TOSHIBA Bar Code Printer

B-EV4 Series
External Equipment Interface Specification

First Edition: October 22, 2008

Second Edition: February 13, 2009
Third Edition: April 15, 2009
Fourth Edition: September 7, 2009
Fifth Edition: October 30, 2009
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page
1. SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................... 1

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 1

3. INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE............................................................................................................. 2
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 6
3.3 USB INTERFACE…………………………………………………………………………………. 8
3.4 NETWORK INTERFACE…………………………………………………………………………. 8

4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 9

4.1 SYSTEM MODE (POWER UP WITH KEY PRESSED) ........................................................ 9
4.1.1 FIRMWARE DOWNLOADING MODE ............................................................................. 9
4.1.2 AUTO CALL CANCELLATION......................................................................................... 9
4.1.3 PARAMETER CLEARANCE ............................................................................................ 9
4.1.4 SENSOR CALIBRATION ................................................................................................. 9
4.1.5 SELF-TEST / DUMP MODE............................................................................................. 9
4.2 ON-LINE MODE FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................. 11

5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE ................................................................................................... 12

5.1 INITIALIZATION .................................................................................................................... 12
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION ................................................................................................. 14

6. INTERFACE COMMANDS......................................................................................................... 16
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS................................................................................................... 16
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS........................................................................................................... 18
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION .................................................................... 20
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND ......................................................................................... 20
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND ............................................................................ 24
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND.................................................................. 29
6.3.4 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND ............................................................................. 30
6.3.5 CLEAR AREA COMMAND............................................................................................... 31
6.3.6 LINE FORMAT COMMAND ............................................................................................. 33
6.3.7 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND ............................................................................ 37
6.3.8 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND........................................................................... 51
6.3.9 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND .................................................................................. 65
6.3.10 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND.................................................................................. 99
6.3.11 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND ................................................................................ 102
6.3.12 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND ........................................................................................ 105
6.3.13 ISSUE COMMAND........................................................................................................... 118
6.3.14 DUPLICATE PRINTING AREA SET COMMAND ............................................................ 129
6.3.15 FEED COMMAND ............................................................................................................ 135
6.3.16 EJECT COMMAND .......................................................................................................... 140
6.3.17 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND...................................................................... 141

i
 6.3.18 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND ..................................................................... 143
6.3.19 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND ........................................................................ 145
6.3.20 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND .................................... 146
6.3.21 SD CARD FORMAT COMMAND ..................................................................................... 147
6.3.22 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND ............................................................ 148
6.3.23 GRAPHIC COMMAND ..................................................................................................... 155
6.3.24 SAVE START COMMAND ............................................................................................... 163
6.3.25 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND ...................................................................................... 164
6.3.26 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND..................................................................................... 165
6.3.27 RESET COMMAND.......................................................................................................... 166
6.3.28 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND..................................................................................... 167
6.3.29 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND ............................ 168
6.3.30 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ......................................................... 170
6.3.31 SD CARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND ......................................................... 171
6.3.32 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND.............................................................. 173
6.3.33 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND......................................................... 174
6.3.34 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND……………………………………………………………... . 175
6.3.35 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND………………………………… .... 176
6.3.36 DHCP FUCTION AND DHCP CLIENT ID SET COMMAND……………………………… 177
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR.................................................................. 178
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND ....................................................................................... 179
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND ............................................................... 184
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND ............................................................................................ 186

7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION................................................................................................. 187

8. ERROR PROCESSING.............................................................................................................. 188

8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS ............................................................................................... 188
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING ................................................................................... 188
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES.................... 190

9. STATUS RESPONSE ................................................................................................................ 191

9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE............................................................................................................. 191
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................... 191
9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 191
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS.............................................................................................................. 192
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 193

10. LED INDICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 195

11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE .................................................................................................... 197

11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER .............. 197
11.2 PRESENTATION................................................................................................................... 204
11.3 OCR-A ................................................................................................................................... 208
11.4 OCR-B ................................................................................................................................... 215
11.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 ......................................................................................................... 221

ii
 11.6 KANJI .................................................................................................................................... 228
11.7 TrueType FONT..................................................................................................................... 235

12. BAR CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................... 242

13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA............................................................................................. 255

14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE ..................................................................... 276

Copyright © 2008
by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
All Rights Reserved
570 Ohito,Izunokuni-shi,Shizuoka-ken,JAPAN

iii
1. SCOPE
This specification applies to the external equipment interface for use with the models, B-EV4 series
general-purpose thermal label/tag printers.

2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through a serial interface (RS-
232C), parallel interface (Centronics), USB, or a network for making various settings and printing labels.
This specification describes how to use the external equipment interface for the TPCL (TEC Printer
Command Language).
The following table shows the system configuration.

Models QM model Japanese model

Flash ROM 4 MB
Memory SDRAM 8 MB
Standard RS-232C
Interface Centronics
USB
LAN
Cutter Full cut Optional Cutter model
Partial cut Optional
Strip module Optional Peel off model

-1-
3. INTERFACE
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
(1) Type : Conforming to RS-232C
(2) Mode of Communication : Full duplex
(3) Transmission Speed : 2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
57600 bps
115200 bps
(4) Synchronization Method : Start-stop synchronization
(5) Start Bit : 1 bit
(6) Stop Bit : 1 bit
2 bits
(7) Data Length : 7 bits
8 bits
(8) Parity : None
Even
Odd
(9) Error Detection : Parity Error Vertical parity error check
Framing Error This error occurs if no stop bit is found in the frame
specified starting with the start bit.
Overrun Error This error occurs if the next data is input before the
data input to the UART from the host is read by the
printer CPU.
(10) Protocol : No-procedure method
(11) Data Input Code : ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(12) Receive Buffer : 1 M bytes

-2-
(13) Transmission Control : XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR)
Protocol
RTS Protocol
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and sends an
XON code (11H). (Transmission or non-transmission of the XON code is selectable by
means of the parameter setting.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer
become 1K bytes or less.
The printer sends an XON code (11H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer are
2K bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off. (Transmission or non-
transmission of the XOFF code is selectable by means of the parameter setting.)

READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol

When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY).
The printer turns the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer are 1K bytes or less.
The printer turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) when the blank positions in the
receive buffer are 2K bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The RTS signal is always “High”.

-3-
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY). The printer also sends an XON code (11H).
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 1K bytes or less, the printer turns the
DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) and sends an XOFF code (13H).
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 2K bytes or more, the printer turns the
DTR signal to “High” level (READY) and sends an XON code (11H).
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
XOFF code or BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer
receive buffer becomes full.)
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off.
The RTS signal is always “High”.

RTS Protocol
When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer turns the RTS signal to “High”
(READY).
The printer turns the RTS signal to “Low” (BUSY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer are 1K bytes or less.
The printer turns the RTS signal to “High” (READY) when the blank positions in the receive
buffer are 2K bytes or more.
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer
becomes full.)
The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).

-4-
(14) RS-232 Interface pin configuration
Host Function 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin Printer Function
1 +5V
RxD 2 3 2 TxD
TxD 3 2 3 RxD
DTR 4 20 4 DSR
GND 5 7 5 GND
DSR 6 6 6 RDY
RTS 7 4 7 N/C
CTS 8 5 8 RDY
9 +5V

(15) Connector Pin Assignment and Signal Description

Signal
Pin No. Function Signal Direction
Name
1 +5V Provide the power of 5V
2 TxD Transmit data Printer →
3 RxD Receive data ← Host
4 DSR Data set ready ← Host
5 GND General Ground
6 RDY Printer ready Printer →
7 N/C Not connected
8 RDY Printer ready Printer →
9 +5V Provide the power of 5V

-5-
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
(1) Type : Centronics
(2) Mode : Conforms to IEEE1284 compatible mode
(3) Data Input Method : Parallel 8 bits (DATA1 ~ 8)
(4) Control Signals : ACK, BUSY, SELECT, DATA • STB, FAULT, PE, INIT (Not used),
AUTOFD (Not used), SELECTIN (Not used)
(5) Data Input Code : ASCII code
European character set 8 bit code
Graphics 8 bit code
(6) Receive Buffer : 16 K bytes

(7) Connector : Printer

Amp. Japan 552742-1 or equivalent
DDK 57RE-40360-73B or equivalent
Cable
Amp. Japan 552470-1 or equivalent
DDK 57E-30360 or equivalent

-6-
(8) Connector Pin Diagram:

Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name

1 DATA • STB 19 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)

2 DATA 1 20 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)
3 DATA 2 21 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)
4 DATA 3 22 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)
5 DATA 4 23 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)
6 DATA 5 24 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)
7 DATA 6 25 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)
8 DATA 7 26 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)
9 DATA 8 27 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)
10 ACK 28 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10)
11 BUSY 29 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11)
12 PE 30 TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31)
13 SELECT 31 INIT (Not used)
14 AUTOFD (Not used) 32 FAULT
15 NC 33 0V
16 0V 34 NC
17 CHASSIS GND 35 NC
18 +5V 36 SELECTIN (Not used)

19 36

1 18

-7-
3.3 USB INTERFACE
(1) Standard: Conforming to USB Standard Rev. 2.0
(2) Data Transfer Type: Control transfer, Bulk transfer
(3) Transfer Rate: Full speed (12Mbps)
(4) Receive Buffer Size: 4K bytes
(5) Transfer Control Method: Status with the receive buffer free space information is sent in
response to a read request immediately after [ESC][WB][LF][NUL], as described below. Based on
this status response, the host computer can transmit data to prevent the buffer from becoming full.
Status to be returned immediately after [ESC][WB][LF][NUL] is sent (23 bytes):

SOH 01H Indicates the header of the status block

STX 02H
Status 3XH Printer status
3XH *Details are described later
Status type 33H Indicates that the status includes the receive buffer free space
information.
Remaining 3XH Remaining number of labels to be printed
count 3XH *Details are described later
3XH
3XH
Length 3xH Total number of bytes of this status block
3XH
Free space of 3XH Free space of the receive buffer
receive buffer 3XH “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
3XH However, the maximum value should be the receive buffer capacity.
3XH
3XH
Receive buffer 3XH Receive buffer capacity
capacity 3XH “00000” (0K byte) to “99999” (99999K bytes)
3XH However, the maximum value differs depending on the models.
3XH
3XH
CR 0DH Indicates the footer of the status block.
LF 0AH

3.4 NETWORK INTERFACE

(1) Configuration: 100BASE LAN
(2) Protocol: TCP/IP
(3) Network Specification: LPR server function, Socket communication function
(4) Receive Buffer Size: 4K bytes

-8-
4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS
4.1 SYSTEM MODE (POWER UP WITH KEY PRESSED)
There are 6 LED light indications with following sequence.
(1) Solid green followed by flashing green indicates the printer has entered into system mode.
(2) Flashing red
(3) Flashing orange
(4) Solid orange
(5) Solid red
(6) Solid green

* The period of each sequence is 1.5 sec.

4.1.1 Firmware downloading mode

1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (2) and push again immediately.
2) Copy the firmware file to printer parallel port by the following command in MS-DOS prompt
mode.
C:\>COPY XXXXXX.NEW /B LPT1:
3) The LED will change to green color and blinking every one-second. When firmware update is
completed, printer will reset automatically.

4.1.2 Auto call cancellation

1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (3).

2) The printer will cancel Auto Call execution. (Refer to 6.3.24)

4.1.3 Parameter clearance

1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (4).

2) The printer will restore to manufacturer’s default setting and reset automatically.

4.1.4 Sensor calibration

1) Install a label/tag roll with the sensor located at proper position.

2) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (5).
3) The printer will set the sensor property for the installed media and measures label length.

Note: A sensor calibration is possible up to 254-mm pitch media.

4.1.5 Self-test / Dump mode

1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (6).

2) The printer will print self-test then enter the dump mode.

-9-
[Self-test printing]
a. Printing program version & check sum
b. Printing various parameters
Parameter Initial value
Tone adjustment +00
Feed adjustment +0.0 mm
Cut position adjustment +0.0 mm
Backfeed adjustment +0.0 mm
Type of character code PC-850
Font of zero 0 (without slash)
Communication speed 9600 bps
Data length 8 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit
Parity NONE(QM)/EVEN(JA)
Transmission control XON/XOFF+READY/BUSY (DTR)
Forward feed wait ON
Control code AUTO
Feed key function FEED
Euro code B0 H
X-coordinate adjustment 0 mm
Sensor selection Transmissive
Sensor adjustment value Transmissive: 12 Reflective: 3
Print speed 5 ips
Flash ROM 4 MB
SDRAM 8 MB
Internal memory External memory
User memory size 704 KB 0 KB
TTF Area 0 KB 0 KB
Writable characters Area 0 KB 0 KB
Spare Area 0 KB 0 KB
PC save Area 704 MB 0MB
(On initial setting,
all area is
allocated for PC
save)
Information None
Total feed distance 0.0 km
Total print distance 0.0 km
Total cut count 0
IP address 192.168.010.020
SUBNET MASK 000.000.000.000
GATEWAY 255.255.255.000
MAC ADDRESS XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
DHCP Disabled
DHCP Client ID FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFF
Socket communication Enabled
Socket communication port 08000

- 10 -
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS
The online mode provides the following functions for issuing labels.
(1) Issuing labels (by external equipment interface commands)
(2) Paper feed (by the [FEED] key)
(3) Pause (by pressing the [FEED] key while printing)
(4) Error indication
(5) Sensor selection
Transmissive sensor, reflective sensor and non-sensor mode are available.
To select the sensor for the media, turn on power to let printer online mode. Open printer cover,
the LED will be turned off. Press FEED key for over 5 seconds, and then release the button, then
printer will enter sensor selection mode.
In sensor selection mode, if LED is changed to green color and press FEED key again, then
reflective sensor is selected.
If LED is changed to orange color and press FEED key again, then non-sensor is selected.
If LED is changed to red color and press FEED key again, then transmissive sensor is selected.
(6) While the printer is in an error state, the [FEED] key functions as restart key.

- 11 -
5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
This section describes the outline of the transmission sequence.

5.1 INITIALIZATION
Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored before the label issue
operation.
(1) Storing writable characters and logo

Power ON

No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory on the
Flash Memory memory board.
Format Command

[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a

Bit Map Writable logo on the flash memory board.
Character Command

No Completion of storing
all characters
Yes

Storing PC interface commands

Label issue operation

NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.

(2) When the SD card is used, and the SD Card Format Command is not sent before
storing already stored writable characters or logos, memory will be taken up with every
such storing.
(3) When the SD card is used, and another operation (storing PC interface commands or
label issue operation) is performed after storing writable characters or logos, the image
buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) If another storing operation does not take place after storing writable characters or
logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after
about 10 seconds. In this case, when the SD card is used, the image buffer will be
cleared automatically.

- 12 -
 (2) Storing PC interface commands

Power ON

No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change) [ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory on the
Flash Memory
memory board.
Format Command

[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface

Save Start Command
commands.

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine [ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
Adjust Command back feed length.

Print Density Fine

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
Adjust Command

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.

[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC

Save Terminate Command
interface commands.

No Completion of
all storing
Yes

Storing writable characters or logos

Label issue operation

NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.

(2) When the SD card is used, and the SD Card Format Command is not sent before storing
already stored PC interface commands, memory will be taken up with every such storing.
(3) When the SD card is used, and another operation (storing writable characters or logos,
label issue operation) is performed after storing PC interface commands, the image
buffer will be cleared automatically.
(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion demands.
(5) If another storing operation does not take place after storing PC interface commands, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, when the SD card is used, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.

- 13 -
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION
An example of the label issue operation is described below.
(1) Where the Saved Data Call Command is not used:

Power ON

Place paper

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine [ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and
Adjust Command back feed length.

Print Density Fine

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.
Adjust Command
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it
Feed Command
with the first printing position.

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Format change>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF

NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Label Size Set Command and Feed Command must
always be sent. When using the same paper after the power is turned off and on, the
Label Size Set Command and Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) After the power is turned off and on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the Outline
Font Format Command, and the Bar Code Format Command should be sent as
occasion demands because they are not protected in memory.

- 14 -
(2) Where the Saved Data Call Command is used:

Power ON

Place paper [ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in the flash
memory.
Saved Data Call Command

Feed Command [ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it

with the first printing position.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No

Power OFF

NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Feed Command must always be sent. When using the
same paper after the power is turned off and on, the Feed Command may be omitted.
(2) If the option for “automatic call at power on” for the Saved Data Call Command has
previously been selected, the Saved Data Call Command may be omitted after the
power is turned off and on.

- 15 -
6. INTERFACE COMMANDS
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS
(1) Format of Interface command

ESC Command & Data LF NUL

The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
There are the following three kinds of control codes:
ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H)
{ (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH)
Automatic selection
(2) How to use reference

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
“…” indicates the repetition of an item.
Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
Other symbols must always be inserted at the designated positions before
being transmitted.
Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.
“0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that entry must be fixed as 3 digits.
Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Note Supplementary explanation of the command.

Refer to Related commands

Examples Explains the command examples.

[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00
[ESC] T 2 0 C 3 0 [LF] [NUL]

(3) Precautions

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification is used, the printer
operation will not be guaranteed. The commands must be used in the online mode. If any
command is transmitted in system mode, the printer will not operate. However, only the Reset
Command can be used.

- 16 -
NOTES:
1. If a command is not recognized as a command, it is ignored.
e.g.) [ESC] H, [ESC]AA, and so on.
2. If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of in put digits does not
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.
3. When a parameter is set to any character/value other than specified characters/values, a
command error occurs.
e.g.) In the case that a value should be set for parameter, “0001” is acceptable, however, “000A”
results in an error.
In the case that a character should be set for parameter, “A” is acceptable, however, “1” results in
an error.
4. If the value range of the parameter is specified, when any value beyond the range is entered, a
command error occurs. (Except for the D command)
5. When a parameter is missing, which cannot be omitted, a command error occurs.
6. The parameter should be set to either a value or a character, even if the parameter is defined as
“Ignore”.
e.g.) a : Ignore
If it is omitted, a command error occurs, except when the parameter is omissible.
If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of input digits does not
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.
7. When any value/character other than available values/characters for the parameter function is set,
a command error occurs.
e.g.) Parameter “e” for the LC command.
e: Type of line
0: Line
1: Rectangle
If “2” is set to parameter “e”, a command error occurs.
8. About D command
1) Parameter “aaaa”, “bbbb” and “cccc”
When any value lager than maximum value is entered for these three parameters, the
entered value is internally changed to the maximum value.
When any value smaller than minimum value is entered for these tree parameters, the
entered value is internally changed to the minimum value.
2) When “aaaa” is smaller than “cccc”, a command error occurs.
3) When “aaaa – cccc < 2mm”, it is internally changed to “cccc = aaaa – 2mm”.

- 17 -
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS
(1) Commands related to setting
Label Size Set Command [ESC] D...................................... 20
Duplicate Printing Area Set Command [ESC] XZ.................................. 129
(2) Commands related to fine adjustment
Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX.................................... 24
Print Density Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AY.................................... 29
(3) Commands related to clear
Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C...................................... 30
Clear Area Command [ESC] XR ................................... 31
(4) Commands related to drawing format setting
Line Format Command [ESC] LC.................................... 33
Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC ................................... 37
Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV.................................... 51
Bar Code Format Command [ESC] XB.................................... 65
(5) Commands related to print data
Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC ................................... 99
Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV ................................. 102
Bar Code Data Command [ESC] RB ................................. 105
(6) Commands related to issue and feed
Issue Command [ESC] XS.................................. 118
Feed Command [ESC] T .................................... 135
Eject Command [ESC] IB ................................... 140
Forward/Reverse Feed Command (Reserved for future) [ESC] U1, [ESC] U2................. 141
(7) Commands related to writable characters
Storage Area Allocate Command [ESC] XF.................................. 143
Flash Memory Format Command [ESC] J1................................... 145
2-Byte Writable Character Code Range Command [ESC] XE.................................. 146
SD Card Format Command [ESC] JA .................................. 147
Bit Map Writable Character Command [ESC] XD ................................. 148
(8) Commands related to graphics
Graphic Command [ESC] SG ................................. 155
(9) Commands related to PC command saving
Flash Memory Format Command [ESC] J1................................... 145
2-Byte Writable Character Code Range Command [ESC] XE.................................. 146
SD Card Format Command [ESC] JA .................................. 147
Save Start Command [ESC] XO ................................. 163
Save Terminate Command [ESC] XP.................................. 164
Saved Data Call Command [ESC] XQ ................................. 165
(10) Commands related to control
Reset Command [ESC] WR ................................ 166
Batch Reset Command [ESC] Z0 .................................. 186
(11) Commands related to status
Status Request Command [ESC] WS................................. 167
Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command [ESC] WB................................. 168
Version Information Acquire Command [ESC] WV................................. 170
SD Card Information Acquire Command [ESC] WI .................................. 171

- 18 -
(12) Commands related to printer information
Printer Information Store Command [ESC] IG................................... 173
Printer Information Request Command [ESC] IR.................................. 174
(13) Commands related to TCP/IP setting
IP Address Set Command [ESC] IP……………………… .. 175
Socket Communication Port Set Command [ESC] IS……………………… .. 176
DHCP Function Set Command [ESC] IH……………………… .. 177

(14) Commands related to parameter setting

Parameter Set Command [ESC] Z2;1 ............................... 178
Fine Adjustment Value Set Command [ESC] Z2;2 .............................. 184

- 19 -
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION

6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D

Function Sets the size of a label or tag.

Format [ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (,dddd) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Pitch length of the label or tag

4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 203dpi Max. 9990 (999.0 mm) / 300dpi Max. 4572(457.2 mm)
5 digits: 203dpi Max. 09990 (999.0 mm) / 300dpi Max. 04572 (457.2mm)
bbbb: Effective print width
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Effective print length
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 203dpi Max. 9970 (997.0 mm) / 300dpi Max. 4552 (455.2mm)
5 digits: 203dpi Max. 09970 (9997.0 mm) / 300dpi Max. 04552 (455.2mm)
dddd: (Omissible) Function: Ignore

Explanation

[Labels]
Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)

Label Label
Effective pitch Effective pitch
print length print length

X Origin of
0
Effective Effective coordinates
Y
print width print width (0, 0)

Y Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

X 0
[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Printing direction: Printing top first]

- 20 -
 [Tags] Black mark
Black mark
(Back side of print) (Back side of print)

Origin of Tag Tag

coordinates
(0, 0)

Tag Tag
Effective pitch Effective pitch
print length print length

X
0 Origin of
Effective Effective coordinates
Y
print width print width (0, 0)
Y Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Printing direction: Printing top first]

[Setting range]
Black mark
(Back side
Stop I of print)
Stop I
position position Tag
Cut E Cut F
position position

Origin c A Origin c
H B H A

Origin d
Origin d

G
Paper feed direction G
D
C
C

[Labels] [Tags]

- 21 -
 [mm]
Model 203 dpi model 300 dpi model
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Thermal head dot density 8 dots/mm (203 dpi) 11.8 dots/mm (300 dpi)
Thermal head width 108 105.7
A: Label/tag pitch Min. 10 25.4 25.4 10 25.4 25.4
Label
Max. 999 152.4 999 457.2 152.4 457.2
Min. 10 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 999 --- 999 457.2 --- 457.2
B: Label length Min. 8 23.4 19.4 8 23.4 19.4
Max. 997 150.4 993 455.2 150.4 451.2
C: Backing paper width/ Tag width Min. 25.4
Max. 112
D: Label width Min. 22.4
Max. 109
E: Label-to-label gap length Min. 2.0 6.0 2.0 6.0
Max. 10.0
F: Black mark length Min. 2.0 6.0 2.0 6.0
Max. 10.0
G: Effective print width Min. 13 13
Max. 108 105.7± 0.2
H: Effective print length Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2
I: Slow up/ down interval Slow –up 1.0
Slow-down 1.0
J: Thickness Label 60µm to 190µm
Tag 60µm to 190µm

Notes (1) Before changing the label size or type of sensor, the Label Size Set Command
must first be transmitted.
(2) The Label Size Set Command is protected in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by
the Feed Command ([ESC] T) and must be aligned with the first print position prior
to printing.
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are determined according to the parameters of the Label Size Set
Command as shown in the figure on the preceding page. For the print stop
position in strip issue mode, refer to the section of the Position Fine Adjust
Command. The effective print area is centered on the label/tag.
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.
Consequently, [A : label/tag pitch] - [H: effective print length] ≥ 2 mm must be
assumed.
(6) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and
cut position are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and according to the
fine adjustment settings in System mode.

- 22 -
 (7) The tag rotation designation of the Issue Command ([ESC] XS) causes the origin
of drawing coordinates to be origin c in the case of “printing bottom first” and to
be origin d in the case of “printing top first”, as shown in the figure.
(8) The parameters must be as shown in the figure and table. Any value or paper
outside the range results in a failure of printing or an error.
(9) The setting for the backing paper width is used for the control of the backing paper
rewind motor for a strip issue. Therefore, this setting is not effective for any mode
other than strip issue mode.

Examples (1) Labels (2) Tags

Effective
print area Black mark
(Back side
Label of print)
50.8 76.2
mm mm
46.8 72.2 Effective
mm mm print area

Tag

76.0 mm
Backing paper

82.0 mm 99.6 mm

[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL] [ESC] D0762, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL] [ESC] T10C30 [LF] [NUL]

- 23 -
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX

Function c Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
automatically set first print start position.
d Adjusts the cut position so that the label will be cut at a position shifted forward or
backward from the automatically set cut position, or adjusts the strip position so that
the label will be shifted forward or backward from the automatically set strip position.
e Adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after cutting, or
adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after stripping.

Format [ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to

be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Feed value to be finely adjusted.
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position
(or strip position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.
ddd: Amount for finely adjusting the cut position (or strip position).
000 to 180 (in 0.1 mm units)
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.
e: Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
ff: Amount for finely adjusting the back feed.
00 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)

- 24 -
Explanation [Feed Length Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the feed for shifting backward or forward)

0.0 mm

One label
First print position

+3.0 mm

One label
First print position

-3.0 mm

One label
Paper feed direction
First print position

[Cut Position Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the cut position for shifting backward or
forward)

0.0 mm

Cut position

+3.0 mm

Cut position

- 3.0 mm

Cut position
Paper feed direction

- 25 -
 [Strip Position Fine Adjustment]

0.0 mm

+3.0 mm

-3.0 mm

Printing in strip issue mode is stopped at the position where the

distance from the middle point of the label-to-label gap to the
3 mm
end of the strip shaft is 3 mm, since the label-to-label gap is
2 mm
assumed to be 2 mm.
When the print stop position is not proper, the print stop position
should be adjusted using the strip position fine adjust function.
2 mm
When the label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, the effective print
length should be set to the maximum (label pitch -2 mm). Then,
the print stop position should be adjusted using the strip
position fine adjust function.

[Back Feed Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the back feed for shifting backward or forward)

0.0 mm

First print position (home position after back feed)

+3.0 mm

First print position (home position after back feed)

- 3.0 mm

First print position (home position after back feed)

Paper feed direction

- 26 -
Notes (1) If the feed value fine adjustment, cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment or
back feed value fine adjustment has been set in system mode (key operation on
the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the fine adjustment in system mode.
The max. fine adjustment values are as follows. However, the max. feed fine
adjustment value is limited within the label pitch.
Feed value fine adjustment .........................................................±50.0 mm
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment............................±18.0 mm
Back feed value fine adjustment .................................................±9.9 mm
(2) After changing the fine adjustment value by this command, one label must be fed
by the Feed Command ([ESC] T) to adjust the first print position.
(3) Each fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(4) If a fine adjustment value is improper, printing will not be performed correctly.
For example, if the back feed fine adjustment value is not set properly,
the print positions without cutting and after cutting will be different from
each other. If the label is fed back excessively, the paper will not be fed
correctly during printing.
In the strip issue mode, the print position may differ between the first
label and the second label. The back feed fine adjustment is used to
adjust the length so that the label is correctly fed back to the position
placed before the forward feed is performed.
(5) The cut position (or the strip position) fine adjustment and back feed value fine
adjustment are effective only when the printer is in cut issue or strip issue mode.

- 27 -
Examples (1) Cut issue

3.5 mm
Cut

Preprinted
2.0 mm

2.0 mm

z
Finely adjust the print
position by +2.0 mm.
z
Finely adjust the cut
position by +3.5 mm.
z
Finely adjust the back
feed value by +1.0 mm.
(3.0 - 2.0 = 1.0)

3.0 mm

Cut

Paper feed
direction [ESC] AX; +020, +035, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T21C30 [LF] [NUL]

(2) Strip issue

1.0 mm 3.0 mm

z
Finely adjust the strip
ABC position by +2.0 mm.
z
Finely adjust the print ABC
position by +1.0 mm.
1.0 mm

Paper feed [ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]

direction [ESC] T20D30 [LF] [NUL]

- 28 -
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the automatically set print density.

Format [ESC] AY; abb, c [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density.

+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)
bb: Print density fine adjustment value
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)
c: Indicates the mode for fine adjustment, thermal transfer or direct thermal.
0: Thermal transfer (The direct thermal model ignores this.)
1: Direct thermal
Explanation (1) The print density fine adjustment is performed by adjusting the time that voltage is
applied to the thermal head.
(2) If the print density fine adjustment value has been set in system mode (key
operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the fine
adjustment by this command and the fine adjustment in system mode. The max.
fine adjustment values for thermal transfer/direct thermal print modes are each
±10.
(3) The fine adjustment values in thermal transfer print mode and direct thermal print
mode can be set independently.
(4) The Print Density Fine Adjust Command is protected in memory (even if the power
is turned off).
(5) The fine adjustment value for both the fine adjust command and the system mode
fine adjustment is 00 at shipment from the factory.

Examples To set the density in thermal transfer print mode to -2.

[ESC] AY; -02, 0 [LF] [NUL]
To set the density in direct thermal print mode to +3.
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]

- 29 -
6.3.4 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C

Function Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics.

Format [ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared.
(2) The increment/decrement designation (described later) is valid until the Image
Buffer Clear Command is transmitted.
(3) The link field designation (described later) is effective until the Image Buffer Clear
Command is sent.

Examples [ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T20C51 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 30 -
6.3.5 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR

Function Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated
area in the drawing area.

Format [ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Designated area start point X-coordinate

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Designated area start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Designated area end point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Designated area end point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of clear
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros.
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.

Explanation

Backing paper

Origin of Label Label

coordinates
(0, 0)

End point
Start point
Effective Effective
print length print length
Start point
End point

Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective Effective
X print width print width
0
Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y 0
X

[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Print direction: Printing top first]

Notes (1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are set to an
upper right and a lower left points, respectively.
(3) The start and end coordinates of the designated area must be set within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

- 31 -
 [Effective print area] [mm]
Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

Examples
Start point of
Origin (0, 0)
designated area

Effective print area

10.0 mm

58.5 mm Designated area

End point of designated area

34.5 mm

76.2 mm

[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 32 -
6.3.6 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC

Function Sets the line format and draws the line.

Format [ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Start point X-coordinate

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Start point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: End point X-coordinate
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: End point Y-coordinate
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical, slant)
1: Rectangle
f: No. of line width dots
1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units)
ggg: Radius of rounded corners of rectangles
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not
performed.)
Fixed as 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)

Explanation

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)

Start point End

Effective point Effective
print length print length
Start
End point
point

Origin of
Effective Effective coordinates
X print width print width
0 (0, 0)
Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y 0
X

[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Print direction: Printing top first]

- 33 -
 [Line]

(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width

(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width

(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| ≤ |Y2 - Y1| ) (4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )

(X1,Y1) (X1,Y1) (X1,Y1)

Line width
(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2) (X2,Y2) (X1,Y1) Line width

Line width Line width

- 34 -
 [Rectangle]

(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000 or parameter omitted

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width Line width

(X2,Y2) (X1,Y1)

Line width Line width

(2) Radius of rounded corners ≠ 000

(X1,Y1) Line width

Radius

(X2,Y2)
Line width

Notes (1) In line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A/B is drawn
according to the start and end point coordinates.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC]
D).

- 35 -
 (4) Programming the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of
line is 1 (rectangle). When the type of line is 0, designation of the radius is
ignored.
When the type of line is 1, and the radius of the rounded corner is 000 or omitted,
a rectangle is printed.
(5) A circle is assumed when:
| X2 - X1 | | Y2 - Y1 |
= ≤ [Radius of rounded corners]
2 2

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

Examples
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

5.0 mm

28.0 mm
0.4 mm

20.0 mm 0.4 mm

30.5 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] LC; 0200, 0350, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 36 -
6.3.7 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC

Function Sets the format indicating on the label at which the bit map font is to be printed and how
it is to be printed.

Format c [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (=rrr------rrr) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Character horizontal magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
dd
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications : 0 to 9
e: Character vertical magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
ee
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications : 0 to 9
ff: Type of font 203dpi models 300dpi models
A: Times Roman (Medium) 12point 8point
B: Times Roman (Medium) 15point 10point
C: Times Roman (Bold) 15point 10point
D: Times Roman (Bold) 18point 12point
E: Times Roman (Bold) 21point 14point
F: Times Roman (Italic) 18point 12point
G: Helvetica (Medium) 9point 6point
H: Helvetica (Medium) 15point 10point
I: Helvetica (Medium) 18point 12point
J: Helvetica (Bold) 18point 12point
K: Helvetica (Bold) 21point 14point
L: Helvetica (Italic) 18point 12point
M: Presentation (Bold) 27point 18point
N: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3point 9.5point
O: Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5point 7point
P: Prestige Elite (Bold) 15point 10point

- 37 -
 Q: Courier (Medium) 15point 12point
R: Courier (Bold) 18point 12point
S: OCR-A 12point 12point
T: OCR-B 12point 12point
U: Kanji (16×16 dots)
V: Kanji (24×24 dots)
W: Kanji (32×32 dots)
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to

40 (a): Writable character 40 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)

51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
to

55 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 5 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)
a: Drive
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1, 2: SD card (Option)
* Fonts A to L are proportional fonts.
ghh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hh: No. of space dots between characters
00 to 99 (in dots)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)
01: 0° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
12: 90° (char.) 180° (char.-string) Available only to the font
23: 180° (char.) 270° (char.-string) type of U, V, and W.
30: 270° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)

- 38 -
 C (aa): Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character magnification (the larger one of horizontal or
vertical magnifications) × 6 dots.)
Jkkll: Bold character designation
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)
kk: No. of horizontal shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
ll: No. of vertical shift dots
00 to 16 (in dots)
Mm: Type of check digits to be attached.
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed)
m: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
oooooooooo: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Zpp: Zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
pp: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20
Pq: Alignment (Omissible, If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)
q: Designates the character position
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
203dpi: 0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
300dpi: 0050 to 1057 (in 0.1 mm units)
5aaaabbbcc: Automatic line feed
aaaa: Character string area of X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
bbb: Line feed length
010 to 500 (in 1 mm units)
cc: Number of lines
01 to 99

- 39 -
 rrr------rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

Explanation (1) Character string number

When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing paper

Origin of
coordinates Label Label
(0, 0)

Sample
Effective Effective Print origin
print length print length of coordinates
Print origin
of coordinates

Origin of
coordinates
Effective print Y Effective print
X (0, 0)
0 width width

X 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y

[Printing direction: Printing bottom first] [Printing direction: Printing top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will be within
the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

- 40 -
 (3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification

Vertical
magnification Horizontal
magnification

Horizontal Vertical
magnification magnification

[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]

Char. height ×
Vertical
magnification

Char.
Enlarge
height
Point of
origin

Char. width Char. Width ×

Left offset Point of
Point of Horizontal magnification Point of
origin of
origin origin of
Horizontal spacing/ next char.
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing) next char.
proportional spacing × Horizontal magnification

(4) Type of font

A: Times Roman :

B: Times Roman :

C: Times Roman :

D: Times Roman :

Ｅ： Times Roman :

F: Times Roman :

G: Helvetica :

H: Helvetica :

I: Helvetica :

Ｊ: Helvetica :

K: Helvetica :

- 41 -
M: Presentation :

N: Letter Gothic :

O: Prestige Elite :

P: Prestige Elite :

Q: Courier :

R: Courier :

S: OCR-A :

T: OCR-B :

U: Kanji (16x16) :

V: Kanji (24x24) :

W: Kanji (32x32) :

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified,
drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character
spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.

Point of
origin
Point of origin of
next char.

(Horizontal spacing/proportional No. of fine adjust space dots

spacing) × Horizontal magnification between characters

- 42 -
 (6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

(01) (12) (23) (30)

01, 12, 23, and 30 are available only to the font type of U, V, and W.

(7) Selection of character attribution

No. of dots in the
horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

(8) Bold character designation

0° 90°

Horizontally Vertically Vertically/

Horizontally Vertically Vertically/
bold bold horizontally
bold bold horizontally
bold
bold

- 43 -
(9) Check digit to be attached
When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only
the check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than the numerals,
drawing is not performed.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
(10) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn. When the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, the
incrementing/decrementing cannot be designated. (If it is designated, it is ignored, and
the printer operates as if there was no designation.)

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for
incrementing/decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the
data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

- 44 -
 (11) Zero suppression
No. of zeros to be suppressed 0 1 2 2 3 4 5
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn. When the
font type is 51, 52, 53, 54 or 55, zero suppression is not designated. If it is designated, it
is ignored, and the printer operates as if there was no designation.
(12) Alignment
No. of dots of character string
area in the X direction

Designated origin Left Center Right Equal space

Automatic line feed

Line feed length Automatic line feed No. of lines
Automatic

If characters are not placed on one line when equal space and automatic line feed is
designated, the following steps should be performed.
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed
on one line if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5.
If characters are still not placed on one line, repeatedly decrease the value of the
character-to-character space, and then reduce the horizontal magnification. When
characters are not placed on one line if the character magnification is set to 0.5 and the
character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field
is also not drawn.)

- 45 -
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. If the number of digits exceeds 255, the excessive
data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;”. After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

- 46 -
Notes

(1) The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,
no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be
calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 003 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB - 0100

0002

AB - 0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB - 0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

- 47 -
 (3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the
fields with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the
Clear Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

(7) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one
format (one page).

Refer to Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)

Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)

- 48 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)

(1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm 30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 49 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 50 -
6.3.8 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

~ Fonts other than TrueType font

Format c [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (=ppp------ppp) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (; qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee: Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
f: Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)
ghhh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hhh: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)

- 51 -
j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the
horizontal direction.
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical
direction.
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
C (aa): Stroked out character
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character size (the larger character width or height) ÷ 8 dots.)
Mk: Type of the check digit to be attached
(Omissible. If omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)
k: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Znn: Zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
nn: No. of zeros to be suppressed
00 to 20

- 52 -
Po: Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)
o: Designates the character position.
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Equal space
aaaa: X direction of character string area
203dpi: 0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
300dpi: 0050 to 1057 (in 0.1 mm units)
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 53 -
~ TrueType font

Format [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, ff, g (, hiii), jj, k (,Lmm)(=ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Character width
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee: Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
ff: Type of font
01: BalloonPExtBol (File name: Ballp_eb.ttf)
02: BlacklightD (File name: Blklt_rg.ttf)
03: BrushScrD (File name: Brush_rg.ttf)
04: CG Times (File name: Tec_cgt.ttf)
05: CG Times Bold (File name: Tec_cgtb.ttf)
06: CG Times Italic (File name: Tec_cgti.ttf)
07: Clarendon Condensed Bold (File name: Tec_clcd.ttf)
08: FlashPBol (File name: Flash_bd.ttf)
09: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett (File name: Tec_gmkh.ttf)
10: GoudyHeaP (File name: Gdyhp_rg.ttf)
11: GilliesGotDBol (File name: Gilli_bd.ttf)
12: GilliesGotLig (File name: Gilli_lt.ttf)
13: NimbusSanNovTUltLigCon (File name: Nsnct_ul.ttf)
14: Ryahd (File name: ryahd.ttf)
15: Ryahd Bold (File name: ryahdbd.ttf)
16: CG Triumvirate (File name: Trium.ttf)
17: CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold (File name: Triumcb.ttf)
18: Univers Medium (File name: Tec_uni.ttf)
19: Univers Bold (File name: Tec_unib.ttf)
20: Univers Medium Italic (File name: Tec_unii.ttf)
21: add_on TrueType font 1 (File name: addttf01.ttf)
22: add_on TrueType font 2 (File name: addttf02.ttf)
23: add_on TrueType font 3 (File name: addttf0e.ttf)
24: add_on TrueType font 4 (File name: addttf04.ttf)
25: add_on TrueType font 5 (File name: addttf05.ttf)
(*1) The font types 21 to 25 are the fonts that a user adds. These fonts can
be used by specifying “addttf01.ttf” to “addttf05.ttf” for the file names
and installing these in the SD card.
(*2) For the fonts stored in flash ROM on the CPU board, parameter “ff” for
the type of font corresponds to the font type according to the setting
made when fonts are stored.

- 54 -
g: Drive
Indicates where the TrueType font files are stored.
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: SD card (Option)
2: SD card (Option)
hiiii: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
h: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
iii: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in dots)
jj: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
(Reserved for future)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)
k: Character attribution
B: Black character
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
* TrueType fonts are not included in the standard character generator data. Therefore,
they must be installed in flash ROM on the CPU board, or the SD card.
For installation of TrueType font and details, refer to the TrueType Font Specification
(TAA-1184).
* If Arabic is selected as the character code, letters are written from right to left.

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

- 55 -
Explanation (1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the
character string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing

paper
Origin of Label
coordinates Label
(0, 0) Print origin of
coordinates

Sample
Effective Effective
print length print length

Origin of
Print origin of
coordinates
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective Effective
X print width print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y 0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Print direction: Printing top first]

• The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will
be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) True Type Font Size

To designate the font size and the unit is 1/72 inch per point.

- 56 -
[Effective print area] [mm]
Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

(4) Character width and character height

Char.
height Char.
height

Char.
width

Char. Standard size Char. width

height (256 × 256 dots)

Char.
width

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots
between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal
spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-to-
character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified
value. When equal space is selected for the alignment, the character-to-character
space setting is invalid. (The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing are
increased or decreased depending on the character size.)

ABC

A B C

- 57 -
 (6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

(7) Selection of character attribution

No. of dots in the
horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

- 58 -
(8) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A
(9) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. When the number of digits exceeds 255, the
excessive data will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.

- 59 -
 (10) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PV01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PV02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PV04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PV05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABC ABCD
D 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

Notes (1) The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,
no drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font, or bar code increment/decrement
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.

- 60 -
[Examples]
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02)
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 03 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB-0100

0002

AB-0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB-0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]

- 61 -
 (4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the
fields with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the
Clear Command is sent.)
(5) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment,
the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjust value so that
characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters are
on the outline font drawing position, the outline font is not painted properly. For
font types A and B, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings
do not overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For font types C,
E, F and G, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not
overlap the area for the designated character width and height.
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear
Command.
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

(8) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one
format (one page).

Refer to Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)

Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)

- 62 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)

( 1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm 30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 63 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000”; LF$; NUL$;

- 64 -
6.3.9 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the bar code is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

~ In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC,
KIX CODE
(WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8
5: JAN13, EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
8: EAN13 + 5 digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I: EAN8 + 2 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: UCC/EAN128
R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S)
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE)
(Postal code for U.K)
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)

- 65 -
e: Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
UCC/EAN128 Modulus 10 + Modulus 103
Customer code Special check digit
POSTNET Special check digit
RM4SCC Special check digit
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
* For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, and RMC4SCC, only “3:
Check digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in dots)
k: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of the bar code
0001 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RMC4SCC, KIX CODE, the height
of the long bar is specified.
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
ooo: Length of WPC guard bar
(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not attached.)
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print

- 66 -
qq: No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement”, “Selection of print or non-
print of numerals under bars” and “No. of zeros to be suppressed”) cannot be set
when the postal code (Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE) is
selected.

- 67 -
~ In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, and Industrial 2 of 5

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(=sss------sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (standard)
4: NW7
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)
O: Industrial 2 of 5
e: Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
MSI IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10
ITF DBP Modulus 10
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
MSI IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10
ff: Narrow bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)
gg: Narrow space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, an element-to-element space is designated.
hh: Wide bar width
01 to 99 (in dots)

- 68 -
ii: Wide space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed to 00.
jj: Character-to-character space width
01 to 99 (in dots)
* In the case of MSI and ITF, character-to-character space width is set to 00.
k: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of the bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not
performed.)
m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
qq: No. of zeros to be suppressed
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)
00 to 20
r: Designates the attachment of start/stop code
(Omissible. If omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)
T: Attachment of start code only
P: Attachment of stop code only
N: Start/stop code unattached
sss------sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on
the type of bar code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 69 -
~ In the case of GS1 DataBar

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF]
[NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
b: GS1 DataBar family
e: Version (Type of GS1 DataBar)
1: GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated
2: GS1 DataBar Stacked
3: GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
4: GS1 DataBar Limited
5: GS1 DataBar Expanded
6: GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of bar code
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
In the case of GS1 DataBar Truncated, set a value obtained by multiplying
one module width by 13.
ijjjjjjjjjj: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. When omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)
i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
kk: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. When omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar
code.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 70 -
~ In the case of Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ooo)
[LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)
(= pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
Q: Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)
ee: ECC type
00 to 14: If value “00” to “14” is designated, barcode command is ignored.
20: ECC200
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 99 (in dots)
gg: Format ID
No function (ignore)
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciiijjj: No. of cells
(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.)
iii: No. of cells in X direction 000 to 144
jjj: No. of cells in Y direction 000 to 144
* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.
ECC200
No. of cells to be Even numbers only
designated
Min./Max. No. of cells 10 × 10 to 144 × 144
Rectangular code 18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16

• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically

set. Also, when any data other than the above values is designated
for the number of cells in X and Y directions, the number of cells is
automatically set.

- 71 -
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk: Code number 01 to 16
ll: No. of divided codes 02 to 16
mmm: ID number 1 001 to 254
nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254
ooo ------ ooo: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits.
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 72 -
~ In the case of PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee: Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg: No. of columns (strings)
01 to 30
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2,000 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 73 -
~ In the case of MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
ee: Security level
00: Fixed
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in dots)
gg: No. of columns/rows
00 to 38
h: Rotational angle of bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 366 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

- 74 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates that the numbers of columns/rows are automatically set by the printer.
In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected. When the
numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns is selected.

- 75 -
~ In the case of QR code (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= oo1, oo2, oo3 ------ oo20)
[LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)
e: Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 52 (in dots)
g: Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h: Rotational angle of the bar code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Mi: Selection of model
(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Kj: Mask number
(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.)
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8: No mask
Jkkllmm: Connection setting
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied
in units of bytes (Not divided)
nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.

- 76 -
~ In the case of MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of bar code
Z: MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)
e: Mode selection (Omissible)
Omitted: Mode 2
0: Mode 0 (Old specification)
1: Mode 1 (Old specification)
2: Mode 2 (New specification)
3: Mode 3 (New specification)
4: Mode 4 (New specification)
5: Mode 2 (New specification)
6: Mode 6 (New specification)
7: Mode 2 (New specification)
8: Mode 2 (New specification)
9: Mode 2 (New specification)
Jffgg: Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
(If mode 0 or mode 1 is designated, it is ignored.)
ff: Code number 01 to 08
gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08
Zh: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block (If mode 0 or mode 1 is
designated, it is ignored.)
(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.)
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block

- 77 -
Explanation (1) Bar code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the
bar code is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Print direction: Printing top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of bar code drawing will
be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

- 78 -
(3) Type of bar code
0: JAN8, EAN8 1: MSI

2: Interleaved 2 of 5 3: CODE39 (standard)

4: NW7 5: JAN13, EAN13

6: UPC-E 7: EAN13 + 2 digits

8: EAN13 +5 digits 9: A: CODE128

B: CODE39 (Full ASCII) C: CODE93

G: UPC-E + 2 digits H: UPC-E + 5 digits

I: EAN8 + 2 digits J: EAN8 + 5 digits

K: UPC-A L: UPC-A + 2 digits

- 79 -
M: UPC-A + 5 digits N: UCC/EAN128

O: Industrial 2 of 5 P: PDF417

Q: Data Matrix R: Customer bar code

S: Highest priority customer bar code T: QR code

U: POSTNET V: RM4SCC

W: KIX code X: MicroPDF417

Z: MaxiCode

- 80 -
 b: GS1 DataBar family
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Truncated

GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar Limited

GS1 DataBar Expanded

GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked

(4)Type of check digit

c Where no check digit is attached, the bar code of the data row will be drawn.
d In the case of the check digit check, if each check digit checked according to
the type of bar code is normal, the bar code will be drawn. If the check digit
not meeting the requirement is designated, the bar code will not be drawn.
e In the case of the check digit auto attachment, each check digit is attached
according to the type of bar code and the bar code is drawn.
f If the type of bar code is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or
UCC/EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the
designation of the type of check digit.
g If the type of bar code is JAN, EAN, or UPC, the designation of no check digit
attachment automatically assume the check digit check.
h DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

- 81 -
 (5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to
the type of bar code. Note that the designated proper value differs according to
the rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used,
etc. Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/11.8 mm)
In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, PDF417, or
MicroPDF417, a 2 to 6-module width is calculated automatically when a 1-module
width is designated.

Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC 4 8 12 16 - -
CODE93 3 6 9 12 - -
CODE128, EAN128 3 6 9 12 - -
PDF417 3 6 9 12 15 18
MicroPDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12

Type of bar code Narrow Wide Character-to-character

Bar Space Bar Space space
MSI 3 3 8 8 0
ITF 3 3 8 8 0
CODE39 3 3 8 8 3
NW7 3 3 8 8 3
Industrial 2 of 5 3 3 8 0 3

When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes the space of (narrow
space ×12) dots. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.

In the case of Data Matrix

1-cell width When 1-cell width is 00 for the Data Matrix,
a two-dimensional code is not drawn.
1-cell width = 3 However, the two-dimensional code printed
on the previous label is cleared.

- 82 -
 In the case of QR code 1-cell width

1-cell width

When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the bar
code printed on the previous label is cleared.

In the case of a postal code

1-module width

(6) Rotational angle of bar code

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

- 83 -
(7) Bar code height

Height

Height

[PDF417, MicroPDF417]

Height

Height
[Postal code]

Height

[GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional/GS1 DataBar Truncated]

Height

[GS1 DataBar Stacked]

Height (The height of the bottom row is 7/5 of the specified height.)

[GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional]

Height (The height of the bottom row is the same as the specified height.)

- 84 -
 [GS1 DataBar Limited]

Height

[GS1 DataBar Expanded]

Height

When the bar code height is 0000, bar code (including guard bars) and numerals
under bars are not drawn. However, the bar code printed on the previous label is
cleared.

(8) Length of guard bar

The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC.
It is ignored in any other cases.

Height of bar code

Length of guard bar

- 85 -
(9) Numerals under bars
Numerals are not or provided under bars according the parameter for the
presence or absence of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under
bars to be printed vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of
numerals under bars is OCR-B. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only
horizontally according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in
the fixed one magnification.
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]
c In the case of JAN and EAN
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits

(Example) EAN8

d In the case of UPC

(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits

(Example) UPC-E

- 86 -
 e In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC
(Example) CODE39

(Example) UCC/EAN128

(10) Start/Stop Code

y This parameter is valid only when the type of bar code is CODE39 and NW7.
y Where the parameter is designated, the program will not check if the transmit print data
is with a start code and stop code.
y When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will
be attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case of
NW7.
y For details, refer to “Auto Attachment of Start/Stop Code” to be discussed later in this
specification.
(11) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code
(code A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2.

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

- 87 -
 Letters and numerals for increment/decrement
For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII), NW-7, CODE93, CODE128, if a data
string other than numerals is included in the data, increment/decrement designation is
performed. If any code which does not exist in each bar code table is contained in the
data, increment/decrement designation is not performed.
Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are possible. Only the
numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are
returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128

Increment/decrement calculation starts from the last digit in the data strings. When
the data string to be calculated is numeric, and the next (upper) digit is “>”, that is a
special code (shown with underline below). The next digit is calculated without
incrementing/decrementing these two digits.
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128

Initial value 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08

INC/DEC +1 +1 +1 +1
1st label 00000 00>08 0A>08 0A9>08
2nd label 00001 00>09 0A>09 0A9>09
3rd label 00002 01>00 1A>00 1A0>00
4th label 00003 01>01 1A>01 1A0>01
5th label 00004 01>02 1A>02 1A0>02

(12) Zero suppression

No. of zeros to be suppressed 0 1 2 2 3 4 5

Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop code is sent to sending print data, the start/stop
code is also counted as a digit. When the bar code type is JAN, EAN, UPC, or UCC/EAN
128, the data will be drawn without zero suppression.

- 88 -
(13) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar
codes. For codes, refer to the bar code table mentioned later.
(14) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data string are linked by the Link
Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

- 89 -
(15) Explanation for Data Matrix
c ECC type
Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correction code (ECC) and restore normal data. Since there are several ECCs. ECC
should be designated according to usage. The general correction ability is as follows.
However, it may vary according to the error conditions.

ECC type Overhead by ECC

ECC200 Approx. 30%

d Format ID No function (Ignore)

e Maximum number of digits
The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type. Since each Kanji
character uses 2 bytes, the maximum number of digits for it becomes half of the
following values.

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556

For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.
f Connection setting
The connection setting is used to comprise data with a set of two-dimensional codes
when the data cannot be expressed with a two-dimensional code. When three two-
dimensional codes are used to comprise data, identification information of 1/3, 2/3,
and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID number is programmed to
include a proper combination of two-dimensional codes when one label contains plural
connecting symbols. For example, when there are two kinds of data containing
identification information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label, combination of two-
dimensional codes is unclear. By adding the ID number, the combination is made
clear.

- 90 -
Cell size and the effective data capacity

ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
Capacit
Row Col y

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

- 91 -
(16) Explanation for the PDF417 and MicroPDF417
c Security level
The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be
designated according to usage to perform the error correction function.
For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

d No. of columns (strings)

The number of rows is variable in the PDF417. The row length (No. of data strings) is
also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be easily printed,
by changing the proportion of the height and width.
The number of columns (data strings) is variable between 1 and 30.
If the number of columns is small when data amount is large and security level is high,
drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of rows exceeds 90
when the number of columns becomes small. (When the PDF417 is used, the
number of rows of symbols is limited from 3 to 90.)
For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the
number of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated,
see the table on page 72. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter
(gg) varies according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for
the set parameter (gg) is set, the bar code is not printed. The number of columns
(data strings) is variable from 1 to 4.
However, the max. number of lines, which is 44, depends on the number of columns.

(17) Explanation for QR code

c Error correction level
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.

Overhead by correcting
Level Error correction ability
an error
High density level Low 7%

Standard level 15%

Reliability level 25%

High reliability level High 30%

- 92 -
 d 1-cell width 1-cell width

1-cell width

When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the two-
dimensional code printed on the previous label is cleared.
e Selection of mode
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.
f Selection of model
Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.
g Mask number
To be sure to read the QR code, it is preferable that white and black modules are
arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern
“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from
appearing in the symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking
pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set
to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate
mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.
h Connection setting
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a
narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The
data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all
input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift
JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below:
“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89 ”.
Code No. 1 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “0123”
Code No. 2 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “4567”
Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “89 ”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 ”.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 84

(18) Explanation for MaxiCode

c Connection setting
For MaxiCode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes.

- 93 -
Notes
(1) The check digit attach and increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no
drawing will take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If
the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field to
be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.

[Example]
c Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1))
d Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2))
e Image Buffer Clear Command
f Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”)
g Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”)
h Issue Command (2 labels)

(0001)

(0100)

(0002)

(0102)

i Issue Command (1 label)

(0003)

(0104)

j Image Buffer Clear Command

k Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”)
l Issue Command (1 label)

(3000)

- 94 -
 (3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next
drawing data is printed. Therefore, the bar code number which differs according to the
drawing fields should be designated. Since the automatic field clear is not performed
between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may
be drawn using the same bar code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the
same bar code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same bar
code No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

(7) The same barcode number cannot be programmed more than once in one format (one
page).

Refer to Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
Bar Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

- 95 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)
(1)

12.5
mm Effective print area

15.0
mm
55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 96 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 97 -
 (3)
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.5
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 98 -
6.3.10 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC

Function Provides data for the bit map font row.

Format c [ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RC; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
(Max. 127 digits when the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55.)
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given
later in this specification.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

Explanation (1) Link field data string

• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is
51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, only up to 127 digits can be linked.
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due
to the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)

Refer to Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

- 99 -
Examples

Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 100 -
 (2) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 101 -
6.3.11 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV

Function Provides data for the outline font row.

Format c [ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RV; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 digits
Any excess data will be discarded.
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given
later in this specification.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

Explanation (1) Link field data string

• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. Data exceeding the max. number
of digits will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command
code is designated.)

Refer to Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)

- 102 -
Examples
Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 103 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 104 -
6.3.12 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND [ESC] RB

Function Provides data for the bar code.

Format c [ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command
[ESC] RB; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Bar code number

00 to 31
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar code.
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
to
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99
The Data Command for the MaxiCode is described later.

Explanation (1) Data check

If there is data in the data row, which does not meet the type of bar code, the bar
code will not be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of
CODE128 (without auto code selection), the bar code will not be drawn.
If there is data different from the one designated using the format ID when Data
Matrix is used, the symbol is not drawn.
(2) No. of digits of data
When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will
be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code, see below.
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code: 2000 digits
MicroPDF417: 366 digits
MaxiCode: 93 digits
Customer bar code: 20 digits
Highest priority customer bar code: 19 digits
POSTNET: 5, 9, 11 digits
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits
KIX CODE: 18 digits
Bar codes other than the above 126 digits
When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code type, the bar code
is not drawn.
For the MaxiCode, the maximum number of digits varies according to the mode. In
mode 2 or 3 and mode 4 or 6, the maximum number of digits is 84 and 93,
respectively.

- 105 -
The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for
ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number
of digits is half those of the values described below since a Kanji character
occupies 2 bytes.
Max number of digits for Data Matrix

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556

- 106 -
Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity

ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

- 107 -
When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters called
code words is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies
according to the contents of data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits
according to modes is as follows.
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the
maximum values become smaller than the following values, since the internal
mode switching code is used.
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value
becomes smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of lines
exceeds 90, the symbols are not drawn.
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified.
The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.
In the case of PDF417
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode: 1108 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 2000 digits
In the case of MicroPDF417
• Binary mode: 150 digits
• Upper case letter/space mode: 250 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 366 digits

No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417 For the MicroPDF417, the printer
sets the security level automatically.
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

- 108 -
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

- 109 -
(3) CODE128 code selection
If the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in
the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)
c Determining the start character
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
to be used is (CODE C).
(b) In any case other than (a) in c, if a control character appears before a
small letter (see f.) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code
is (CODE A).
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).
d If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a), c:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric
data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the
number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric
data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should
conform to (b) and (c) in c.
e If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character just before the first numeric data.
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character immediately after the first numeric data.
f If a control character appears in (CODE B):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next
control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first control character.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control
character.
g If a small letter appears in (CODE A):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next
small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)
character before the first small letter.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small
letter.
h If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other
than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform
to (b) and (c) in c.

- 110 -
(4) CODE128 code selection check
Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been
set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn.
[Conditions causing an error]
c No start code is designated.
d A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).
e A control character is found in (CODE B).
f Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found
in (CODE C).
g There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.
h The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.
i (SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).
(5) Kanji code selection
• In the case of Data Matrix and PDF417, Kanji codes can be printed. Shift JIS,
JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8 codes can be mixed.
(6) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 2000 digits of data strings of Data Matrix and PDF417 can be linked. For
other bar codes, up to 126 digits can be linked. (The value varies according to
the type of bar code.)
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be
discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the
Link Field Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to
the omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only
remaining data will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline
font fields, and bar code fields.
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV”, or “RB” command
code is designated.)

- 111 -
(7) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
c Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

d Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

e Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is
designated when the mode is selected.

Mode Code Details

N Numerals 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

(8) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.

Data to be printed

(9) How to transmit the control code data

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H)

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH)

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH)
* How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H)

- 112 -
(10) Transfer code for QR code

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.
(11) Examples of data designation
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode : 123456
Kanji mode : Kanji data
Binary mode : a i u e o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o ,AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed data strings printed

Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

- 113 -
(12) MaxiCode data
For mode 0 or 1:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 2 or 3:
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 4 or 6:
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]
c bbbbbbbbb: Postal code Fixed as 9 digits
• Mode 0 or 2:
b1b2b3b4b5: Zip code Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics)
b6b7b8b9: Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics)
• Mode 1 or 3:
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code Fixed as 6 digits (Character “A” of
code set)
b7b8b9: Vacant Fixed as 3 digits (20H)
d ccc: Class of service Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
e ddd: Country code Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)
f eee --- eee: Message data strings 84 digits
g fffffffff: Primary message data strings 9 digits
h ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings 84 digits

NOTES: 1. When anything other than numerics is included in the data string of zip
code (mode 2), zip code extension, class of service or country code, a
MaxiCode is not drawn.
2. If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected,
the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining
digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When message data
exceeding 84 digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before
drawing a MaxiCode.
3. If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when
mode 4 or 6 is selected, the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the
data, and the remaining digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When
message data exceeding 93 digits is received, the excess data will be
discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
4. Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for
scanner programming.

- 114 -
Examples

(1) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

15.0 mm

55.0 mm

20.0 mm

63.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 115 -
 (2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm
55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 116 -
 (3)
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.5
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 04, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 117 -
6.3.13 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS

Function Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.

Format [ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Number of labels to be issued

0001 to 9999
bbb: Cut interval. Designates the number of pieces to be printed before the
backing paper is cut.
000 to 100 (no cut when 000)
c: Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
4: Reflective sensor
d: Issue mode
C: Batch mode
D: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is valid. For 203dpi, 2ips
and 3ips are valid for strip mode, for 300dpi, 2ips is valid for
strip mode)
E: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is ignored,
the applicator supports this mode. For 203dpi, 2ips and 3ips
are valid for strip mode, for 300dpi, 2ips is valid for strip
mode.)
F: Partial cut mode (Non back feed cut mode)
e: Issue speed
1: 2 inches/sec
2: 2 inches/sec
3: 3 inches/sec
4: 4 inches/sec
5: 5 inches/sec (300dpi 4inches/sec)
6: 5 inches/sec (300dpi 4inches/sec)
7: 5 inches/sec (300dpi 4inches/sec)
8: 5 inches/sec (300dpi 4inches/sec)
9: 5 inches/sec (300dpi 4inches/sec)
A: Max. 2 inches/sec. or 5 inches/sec. (Depending on a duplicate printing
area setting for duplicate labels. Only for the 203 dpi model)
B: Max. 5 inches/sec. (When using duplicate labels and no duplicate printing
is necessary. Only for the 203 dpi model)
f: With/without ribbon
Direct thermal models:
Set to 0. (If “1” or “2” is specified, a ribbon error results.)
Thermal transfer models:
0: Without ribbon
1: With ribbon
2: With ribbon

- 118 -
 g: Designates tag rotation.
0: Printing bottom first
1: Printing top first
2: Mirror printing bottom first
3: Mirror printing top first
h: Type of status response
0: No status response
1: Status response

Explanation (1) Number of labels to be issued

c If increment/decrement is not specified, the designated number of pieces with
the same drawing data will be issued.
d If increment /decrement is specified, the designated number of pieces will be
issued while incrementing/decrementing the piece of the designated drawing
area.
* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
(2) Cut interval
The cut interval is valid only when the cutter has been installed and the issue
mode is “C” of “F”. If an error occurs during an issue after the cut interval is
designated, and then printing is restarted, the printer ejects the printed paper then
resumes printing on the paper where the error occurred.
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after cut-issuing
the last label, when the cut interval is valid and “with automatic forward feed
standby” set in the system mode, the printer automatically performs a 16.3-mm
forward feed.
When the Issue Command is received during the automatic forward feed standby,
an issue is started after a reverse feed to the original position.
If any command is sent and processed after the Issue Command is sent, the
automatic forward feed is not performed. Therefore, a command should not be
sent after the Issue Command is sent. If the power should not be turned off then
on, or the printer should not be placed in a pause/reset state before the automatic
forward feed, since the automatic forward feed is not performed when the paper is
fed by turning the power off then on, or by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer
in the pause/reset state.
If the paper is fed by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer during the forward
feed standby, the printer feeds one label, cuts, performs the automatic forward
feed then stops.
(3) Type of sensor
c No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the
Label Size Set Command.
Note: When the “F: Partial cut mode” is designated for the issue
mode, “No sensor” should be selected. (The partial cutter is
supposed to be used for cutting continuous media, like receipt
rolls.)

- 119 -
 d Reflective sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position
is finely adjusted for every piece.
e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by
the transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every
piece.

(4) Issue mode

[C: Batch mode (cut interval 0)]

Head position

(1) Idling
(during automatic forward feed standby)

A (2) Prints 1st label (A)

A B (3) Prints 2nd label (B)

A B C (4) Prints 3rd label (C)

[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]

“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode

Cut position Head position

(1) Idling

A (2) End of printing 1st label (A)

A (3) Feeds to the cut position

A (4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position

and is cut.
B (5) Feeds back to the head position and start to
print the 2nd label (B) .
B (6) End of printing 2nd label (B)

B (7) Feeds to the cut position

B (8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position

and is cut.
(9) Feeds back to the home position

- 120 -
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode

Cut position Head position

(1) Idling

A (2) End of printing 1st label (A)

A (3) Feeds to the cut position

A (4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position

and is cut.
B (5) Feeds back to the head position and start to
print the 2nd label (B) .
B (6) End of printing 2nd label (B)

B (7) Feeds to the cut position

B (8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position

and is cut.
(9) Feeds back to the home position

(10) 16.3-mm automatic forward feed

after 3 seconds (Reserved for future)

- 121 -
[D: Strip mode (Issue count: 3)]

Strip position Head position

(1) Idling

(2) Feeds back to the home position

A (3) End of printing 1st label (A)

(4) Removes 1st label (A)

(5) Feeds back to the home position

B (6) End of printing 2nd label (B)

(7) Removes 2nd label (B)

(8) Feeds back to the home position

C (9) End of printing 3rd label (C)

* The next label is not printed until the printed

label is removed.

- 122 -
 [F: Partial cut mode (Non back feed cut mode)]

Cut position Head position

(1) Idling

A (2) End of printing 1st label (A)

A (3) Feeds to the cut position

A (4) The 1st label (A) is partially cut.

A B (5) End of printing 2nd label (B)

A B (6) Feeds to the cut position

A B (7) The 2nd label (B) is partially cut

The 1st and 2nd labels are removed
together.
(8) Idling

- 123 -
(5) Issue speed * Duplicate printing feature is supported only by the 203 dpi model.
• Printing takes place at the designated speed.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.

Issue speed

Model 203 dpi model 300 dpi model

Issue mode E:
C: Batch D: Strip E: Strip C: Batch D: Strip
Parameter Strip
1
2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec
2
3 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec
4 4”/sec 4”/sec 4”/sec
5
6
4”/sec 4”/sec 4”/sec
7 5”/sec 5”/sec 5”/sec
8
9
A Max. 2”/sec. or
5”/sec.
(Depending on a
duplicate printing area
setting for duplicate
labels) Not guaranteed.
B Max. 5”/sec.
(When using
duplicate labels and
no duplicate printing
is necessary.)

Printing is performed according to the issue speed parameter settings:

1 to 9: Normal printing on normal labels
A: Duplicate printing on duplicate labels
B: Normal printing on duplicate labels

- 124 -
 (6) Tag rotation
The origin of coordinates and printing direction vary according to the designation
of tag rotation.
c Printing bottom first

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of print)
Label Tag
Origin of Origin of
coordinates coordinates
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length Sample print length Sample

Effective Effective
print width print width
X X
0 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y Y
[Labels] [Tags]

d Printing top first

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of print)
Label Tag

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length print length

Origin of Origin of
Effective coordinates Effective coordinates
print width (0, 0) print width (0, 0)
Y Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 0
X X

[Labels] [Tags]

- 125 -
 e Mirror printing bottom first

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of print)
Label Tag
Origin of Origin of
coordinates coordinates
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective
pitch
print length print length

Effective Effective
print width print width
X X
0 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y Y
[Labels] [Tags]

f Mirror printing top first

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of print)
Label Tag

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective
pitch
print length print length

Origin of Origin of
coordinates Effective coordinates Effective
(0, 0) print width (0, 0) print width

Y Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 0
X X
[Labels] [Tags]

- 126 -
 (7) Status response
When the option with status response has been selected, a status response is
made at the end of printing or if an error occurs.
In batch mode and cut mode, the print end status response is made after printing
on the designated number of labels.
In strip mode, the status response is made after printing one label.
* Do not change the parameter for status response/no status response during
printing. Otherwise the status response may not be performed properly.

Examples

• Issue count: 4 pieces

41.0
• Cut interval: 1 piece
mm • Paper: Tag paper (Reflective
Sample sensor used)
76.2 • Issue mode: Cut issue
73.2 mm
mm • Issue speed: 5”/sec.
• Ribbon: With
• Status response: On

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C5201 [LF] [NUL]

- 127 -
Notes (1) Explanation of processes involved to stop the label at the home position after the
head-open state is detected:
When the gap between labels (black mark) is found after the head open state is
detected, the value to stop at the home position of each label between the head
and the sensor is set again.

Stop position Sensor

A B C

77 mm

92 mm

• The paper is moved in the above state.

Stop position Sensor

A B C

• Stop position after feeding one label

Stop position Sensor

+15 mm after detection
of gap between B and C

A B C D

* However, an error will result when feed jam conditions are met.
Paper feed direction

(2) Any cut or strip issue commands should not be sent to the printer on which the
cutter or strip module is not installed.

- 128 -
6.3.14 DUPLICATE PRINTING AREA SET COMMAND [ESC] XZ

Function Specifies a duplicate printing area, a high power duplicate printing area, and a print
density fine adjustment value for high power duplicate printing.
* Duplicate printing feature is supported only by the 203 dpi model.

Format {XZ;aaaa,bbbb,cccc,dddd,ee|}

Term aaaa: Duplicate printing area start position

Fixed to 4 digits (in units of 0.1mm)
bbbb: Duplicate printing area length
Fixed to 4 digits (in units of 0.1mm)
cccc: High power duplicate printing area start position
Fixed to 4 digits (in units of 0.1mm)
dddd: High power duplicate printing area length
Fixed to 4 digits (in units of 0.1mm)
ee: Print density fine adjustment value for high power duplicate printing
00 to 10 (in units of step)

Explanation (1) This command specifies a location and size of a duplicate printing area within an
effective print area, set by a Label Size Set Command, also, a high power
duplicate printing area within the duplicate printing area. (Duplicate printing
areas are printed at 2”/sec.)
(2) A high power duplicate printing area is printed at the print density (positive value
only) specified by this command. (High power duplicate printing areas are printed
at 2”/sec.)
When the print density fine adjustment value has been set by a Print Density Fine
Adjust Command (AY), refer to Notes (5).
(3) Duplicate printing is effective only when the issue speed is set to “A” by an Issue
Command.

Notes (1) Duplicate Printing Area Set Command is backed up in the memory. (Retained even
after the power is turned off.)
(2) It is possible to specify one duplicate printing area within an effective print area,
and one high power duplicate printing area within a duplicate printing area,
respectively.
(3) Duplicate printing areas and high power duplicate printing areas are effective on
the following conditions. (When these areas do not meet the following conditions,
a normal printing is performed instead of duplicate printing or high power duplicate
printing.)
Effective print length: Min. 30.0 mm
Duplicate printing area length: Min. 20.0 mm
High power duplicate printing area length: Min. 10.0 mm
(When a duplicate printing area is effective, a normal printing area with the length
of less than 5.0 mm will be merged into a duplicate printing area. See Examples
on the following pages.)

- 129 -
 Also, there are a few notes on duplicate printing areas and high power duplicate
printing areas, as follows:
• Areas 1-mm inside of a high power duplicate printing area are printed at the
print density for duplicate printing areas.
• When a specified high power duplicate printing area is exactly the same as a
duplicate printing area, that area will be printed as a high power duplicate
printing area.
• When a high power duplicate printing area is allocated at 1-mm inside of a
duplicate printing area (1 mm from each boundary), the high power duplicate
printing is performed as specified.
(4) Printing is not possible in the areas 1-mm inside of a duplicate printing area.
(5) Note that the actual print density fine adjustment value for high power duplicate
printing is a sum of the values specified by this command and a Print Density Fine
Adjust Command (AY). The maximum value is +10.
Example)
Print Density Fine Adjust Command (AY): +5
Print density fine adjustment value for high power duplicate printing: +5
In the above case, high power duplicate printing areas will be printed at +10 and
the other areas will be at +5, respectively.
(6) On-the-fly issue is available even when a label has both a normal printing area and
a duplicate printing area.
(7) When the issue speed is set to “A” without a duplicate printing area specified, the
printer automatically operates at an issue speed of “B”.
(8) When the issue speed is set to “B” with a duplicate printing area specified, the
printer operates at an issue speed of “B” without performing duplicate printing.

- 130 -
Examples

Label pitch (178.0mm)

Effective print length (175.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

(99.0mm) High power duplicate

printing area (19.0mm)

Normal printing area Duplicate printing

(65.0mm) area (110.0mm)

Print direction

{D1780,1040,1750|}
{XZ;0650,1100,0990,0190,05|}
{T10C60|}

- 131 -
When a normal printing area is 5.0 mm or less:

[In the case a preceding normal printing area is merged.]

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A=3.0mm B=Duplicate printing area (40.0mm) C=5.0mm

Print direction

Because A is less than 5.0 mm, that area is merged into the duplicate printing area.

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A+B=Duplicate printing area (43.0mm) C=5.0mm

Print direction

- 132 -
[In the case a subsequent normal printing area is merged.]

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A=5.0mm B=Duplicate printing area (40.0mm) C=3.0mm

Print direction

Because C is less than 5.0 mm, that area is merged into the duplicate printing area.

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A=5.0mm B+C=Duplicate printing area (43.0mm)

Print direction

- 133 -
[In the case both preceding and subsequent normal printing areas are merged.]

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A=3.0mm B=Duplicate printing area (42.0mm) C=3.0mm

Print direction

Because A and C are less than 5.0 mm, respectively, those areas are merged into the duplicate printing
area.

Label pitch (50.0mm)

Effective print length (48.0mm)

Effective
print width
(104.0mm)

A+B+C=Duplicate printing area (48.0mm)

Print direction

- 134 -
6.3.15 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T

Function Feeds the paper.

Format [ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Type of sensor

0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)
4: Reflective sensor
b: Selects cut or non-cut
0: Non-cut
1: Cut
c: Feed mode
C: Batch mode (Cut and feed when “Cut” is selected for parameter b.)
D: Strip mode (with back feed)
E: Strip mode (Reserved for future)
F: Partial cut mode (Non back feed cut mode)
d: Feedspeed
1: 2 inches/sec (2 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
2: 2 inches/sec (2 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
3: 3 inches/sec (3 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
4: 4 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
5: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
6: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
7: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
8: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
9: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
A: 5 inches/sec (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
B: 5 inches/sec. (4 inches/sec for the 300 dpi model)
e: With/without ribbon
Direct thermal models:
Set to 0. (If “1” or “2” is specified, a ribbon error results.)
Thermal transfer models:
0: Without ribbon
1: With ribbon
2: With ribbon

Explanation (1) Type of sensor

c No sensor:
Media feed takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label
Size Set Command.
Note: When the “F: Partial cut mode” is designated for the feed mode, “No
sensor” should be selected. (The partial cutter is supposed to be used for
cutting continuous media, like receipt rolls.)

- 135 -
 d Reflective sensor:
Media feed takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label
Size Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the
tag paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position
is fine adjusted.
e Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):
Media feed takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label
Size Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by
the transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.

(2) Cut/non-cut
This option is valid in batch feed mode only. (Non-cut is selected in strip mode.)
When “with automatic forward feed standby” is set by the parameter setting and if
no subsequent command from the PC is received within 3 second after cut-
feeding, the printer automatically performs a 16.3-mm forward feed.
When the Feed Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the
printer performs a reverse feed to the original position.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.

(3) Feed mode

[C: Batch (Non-cut)]
Head position

(1) Place paper.

(2) End of feed

(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)

[C: Batch (Cut)]

“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.

Cut position Head position

(1) Place paper.

(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)

(3) Feeds to the cut position.

(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.

(5) Feeds back to the home position.

- 136 -
[C: Batch (Cut)]
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.

Cut position Head position

(1) Place paper.

(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)

(3) Feeds to the cut position.

(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.

(5) Feeds back to the home position.

(6) 16.3-mm automatic forward feed after 3 second

(Reserved for future)

[D: Strip]

Strip position Head position

(1) Place paper.

(2) Feeds back to the home position.

(3) Feeding starts

(4) End of feed

(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)

* If a label is not removed, a feed is performed.

[F: Partial cut mode]

Cut position Head position

(1) Place paper.

(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)

(3) Feeds to the cut position.

(4) Cuts and unnecessary paper is cut off manually.

(5) Idling.

- 137 -
 (4) Feed speed
• A feed is performed at the designated speed.
However, the back feed speed in the cut mode or the strip mode is 3”/sec.
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper
supply.
For details, refer to the Supply Specification.

Model 203 dpi model 300 dpi model

Issue mode E:
C: Batch D: Strip E: Strip C: Batch D: Strip
Parameter Strip
1
2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec 2”/sec
2
3 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec 3”/sec
4 4”/sec 4”/sec 4”/sec
5
6
7
4”/sec 4”/sec 4”/sec
8 5”/sec 5”/sec 5”/sec
9
A
B

Notes (1) If a change of label size or type of sensor, feed fine adjustment, cut position fine
adjustment (or strip position fine adjustment) or back feed fine adjustment is
made, one label must be fed to adjust the first print position prior to printing.
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) When “status response made” is selected in the Issue Command parameter
setting, a status response is made after the end of feed or when an error occurs.
(4) For explanation about the process to stop the label at the home position, refer to
the section regarding the Issue Command.
(5) When “with automatic forward feed standby” is selected by the parameter setting
and if no subsequent command is received from the PC after the last label has
been fed, the printer automatically performs a 16.3-mm forward feed. When the
Feed Command is received during the forward feed standby, the printer feeds the
label in reverse to the original position.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.

- 138 -
Examples

41.0
mm
76.2 mm
73.2 Sample
mm

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]

- 139 -
6.3.16 EJECT COMMAND [ESC] IB

Function Ejects (cuts) the label presently remaining between the head and the cutter and returns
to the original position.

Format [ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]

Notes When “with automatic forward feed standby” is selected by the parameter setting and if
no subsequent command from the PC is received within 3 second after ejection, the
printer automatically performs a 16.3-mm forward feed.
When the Eject Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the printer
feeds the label in reverse to the original position and ejects it.
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.

Examples
Cut position Head position

(1) Idling

A (2) End of printing 1st label (A)

A B (3) End of printing 2nd label (B)

A B C (4) End of printing 3rd label (C)

A B C (5) Feeds to the cut position by the

Eject Command
A B C (6) End of cutting

(7) Since non-stop cut is performed,

paper is fed over the cut position.

(8) Feeds back to home position.

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]

- 140 -
6.3.17 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND [ESC] U1, [ESC] U2

Function After printing or feeding the paper, feeds the paper to a manually cut position.
When issuing the next label, feeds the paper back to the first printing position.

Format Forward Feed

[ESC] U1; aaaa [LF] [NUL]
Reverse Feed
[ESC] U2; aaaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Feed value by which the paper is fed forward or backward.
0030 to 2000 (in 0.1 mm units)

Notes (1) When the [FEED] key is pressed on the printer, one label is fed, and then fed by
the forward feed value automatically if the Forward Feed Command has already
been transmitted.
(2) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(3) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is ignored in strip mode and cut issue
mode.
(4) The forward feed is performed at the speed designated in the Issue Command or
Feed Command.
.

- 141 -
Examples

Cut position Head position

(1) Idling

(2) Feeds one label

(3) Feeds to the position at which a

label can be cut manually.
(4) Cut manually.

(5) Standby

(6) Feeds back to the home position

A A A (7) Prints three A labels

A A A (8) Feeds to the position at which

labels can be cut manually.
A A A (9) Cut manually.

(10) Standby

(11) Feeds back to home position

B (12) Prints one B label

B (13) Feeds to the position at which

a label can be cut manually.
B (14) Cut manually.

(15) Standby

[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0003, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
Cut manually.
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]

- 142 -
6.3.18 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF

Function Allocates the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XF; aa, bb [, cc] [, Ed] [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area

00 to 11 (0 KB to 704 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
bb: Size for bit map Writable character storage area
00 to 11 (0 KB to 704 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size for spare storage area
00 to 11 (0 KB to 704 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
Ed: Indicates where the upper files are stored. (Omissible)
d:
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board

Explanation (1) The storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board has a total capacity of 704 KB.
(2) If this command is received, the complete area in flash ROM on the CPU is
cleared.
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU cannot be
used.
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order – the TrueType font storage
area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the spare storage area.
After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining area is used for the PC
save area.
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character
storage area, and the spare storage area, specified by this command, is 704 KB,
the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and
the spare storage area are allocated as specified. However, the PC save area is
not allocated.
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage
area, and the spare storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 704 KB, the
TrueType font storage area is allocated first, as specified. Then, the remaining
area is allocated to the bit map writable character storage area. If there is
remaining area after the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable
character storage area is allocated, it is used for the spare storage area. The PC
save area is not allocated.

- 143 -
 (7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for the TrueType font storage area, the bit map
writable character storage area, or the spare storage area, the storage area is not
allocated.
(8) When “11” (704 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit
map writable character storage area, and the spare storage area, all storage areas
are used. Therefore, other storage areas cannot be allocated. For example, if
“192” is specified for the TrueType Font storage area, all storage areas are used
for the TrueType Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area,
the BASIC file storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.
Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)

Example The TrueType font storage area, bit map writable character storage area, and spare
storage area are set to 64 KB, respectively.
(PC save area: 704 KB – 64KB – 64 KB – 64 KB = 512 KB)
[ESC] XF; 01, 01, 01, E0 [LF] [NUL]

- 144 -
6.3.19 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1

Function Formats (initializes) the flash ROM on the CPU board for storage.

Format [ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Formatting (initializing) range

A: Entire area of the flash memory (PC save area + writable character area)
B: PC save area of the flash memory
C: Writable character storage area of the flash memory
D: True Type area
b: Drive (Omissible. When omitted, the flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board

Explanation (1) When using a new flash memory, the area to be used must be formatted
(initialized) before the PC interface command or writable characters are stored.
(2) When the already stored data (PC interface commands, writable characters, logos)
is stored again, the memory is consumed every time data is stored, unless the
Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted.
(3) When a label issue operation is performed after the Flash Memory Format
Command is sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(4) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued for about 10 seconds, the printer automatically enters the online mode
(label issue operation). At this time, the image buffer is automatically cleared.

Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Example [ESC] J1; A, 0 [LF] [NUL]

- 145 -
6.3.20 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND [ESC] XE

Function Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in flash ROM on
the CPU board or SD card.

Format [ESC] XE;(Sj, cc,)a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 ---, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]

Term Sj, cc,: Drive and Writable character set (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the
CPU board and writable character set “51” are selected.)
0, 51 to 55: Flash ROM on the CPU board
Writable character code 51 to 55
1 or 2, 51 to 55: SD card
Writable character code 51 to 55
aaaa: First character code for each range
2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
bbbb: No. of characters for each range
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)

Explanation (1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be
divided into two or more. The control information area for the unnecessary code
can be deleted by designating the character code range, and the capacity of SD
card is not wasted.
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0x4000 (16384
characters).
(3) Up to 2700 can be designated for the range.
(4) A character code which is not appropriate for the setting for this command cannot
be stored.

Refer to • SD Card Format Command ([ESC] JA)

• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

Example In the case that Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH: Character data is present.
Character data is not present.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
8140
:
81F0
:
8240
:
82F0
:
8340
:
83D0

[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]

- 146 -
6.3.21 SD CARD FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] JA

Function Formats (initializes) the SD card for storage.

Format [ESC] JA; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Formatting (initializing) range for SD card

A: All area
B: PC save area
C: Bitmap writable character storage area
D: True Type area
b: Drive (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: SD card (Option)
2: SD card (Option)

Explanation (1) Up to 4GB SD card can be formatted. (There are recommended SD cards.)
(2) The SD card can be roughly divided into the PC save area and the writable
character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either separately or at
the same time.
(3) When using a new SD card, the area to be used must be formatted (initialized)
before the PC interface command is saved or writable characters are stored.
(4) After formatting the SD card, the remaining memory is the PC save area and
writable character storage area.
(5) When the SD card is used and the already stored data (PC interface commands,
writable characters, logos) is stored again, memory is consumed with every storing
unless the Format Command ([ESC] JA) is transmitted.
(6) When performing the label issue operation after sending the SD card Format
Command, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(7) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not
continued, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)
after about 10 seconds. In this case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.

Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Example [ESC] JA; A, 1 [LF] [NUL]

- 147 -
6.3.22 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND [ESC] XD

Function Writes writable characters and logos in SD card, or flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format For SD card or flash ROM on the CPU board

[ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]

Term Sj: Drive

0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: SD card (Option)
2: SD card (Option)
aa: Writable character set
01 to 40
51 to 55 (2-byte code character)
b(b): Writable character code
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character set is 51 to 55)
ccc: Left offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
ddd: Top offset
000 to 719 (in dots)
eee: Character width
001 to 720 (in dots)
fff: Character height
001 to 720 (in dots)
ggg: Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
000 to 999 (in dots)
h: Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored

Explanation (1) Type of writable character

Up to 40 and 49 writable character sets can be stored for SD card, respectively.
However, the maximum number of characters varies depending on the writable
character size and number of characters because of the limited memory capacity.
(2) Character code
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of
characters is 40 sets × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending on
the writable character size and number of characters because of the limited
memory capacity.
(3) SD card can be used for storing a writable character.

- 148 -
 (4) The configuration of the writable character file stored in SD card is as follows.

1st byte No. of dots for left offset

2nd byte (from upper to lower)
3rd byte No. of dots for top offset
4th byte (from upper to lower)
5th byte No. of dots for character height
6th byte (from upper to lower)
7th byte No. of dots for character width
8th byte (from upper to lower)
9th byte No. of dots for horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
10th byte (from upper to lower)
11th byte Writable character data (Hex. data)
(If it is stored in the nibble mode, data is 8 bits/byte.)

1-byte writable character W/C = Writable character

Memory 0100 01000020. UDF (W/C file for character code 20H)
(Writable character 01) 01000021. UDF (W/C file for character code 21H)
0101 Each W/C file 01000022. UDF (W/C file for character code 22H)
(Writable character 02)
0102 Each W/C file 010000FD. UDF (W/C file for character code FDH)
(Writable character 03) 010000FE. UDF (W/C file for character code FEH)
010000FF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFH)
0126 Each W/C file
(Writable character 39)
0127 Each W/C file
(Writable character 40)

2-byte writable character

0200 02002020. UDF (W/C file for character code 2020H)
(Writable character 51) 02002021. UDF (W/C file for character code 2021H)
0201 Each W/C file 02002022. UDF (W/C file for character code 2022H)
(Writable character 52)
0202 Each W/C file 0200FFFD. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFDH)
(Writable character 53) 0200FFFE. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFEH)
0203 Each W/C file 0200FFFF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFFH)
(Writable character 54)
0204 Each W/C file
(Writable character 55)

- 149 -
• How to assign the directory name for a writable character set
Directory name for writable character 01 → “0100”
Directory name for writable character 02 → “0101”

Directory name for writable character 39 → “0126”

Directory name for writable character 40 → “0127”

Directory name for writable character 51 → “0200”

Directory name for writable character 55 → “0204”

• How to assign the file name

0100 0022. UDF (Writable character 40: writable character file for character code 22H)
Identifier indicating the writable character file
Character code (2-byte code: Code 22H)
Writable character set (Writable character 40: Same as the directory name)

- 150 -
 (5)

Top
offset
22 dots

Char.
height
31 dots
Base line

Reference Reference point

point of next char.

Left Char. width

offset 26 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots

(6) Writable character set: 01 to 40, 51 to 55

Char. width 26 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 3FH 5 3CH 6 30H 7 30H 8 30H
9 3FH 10 3CH 11 37H •
•
•
•
Char. •
height •
31 dots
• 240 30H
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 0FH 3 C0H 4 00H
5 FCH 6 7FH
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 •
•
8 8 8 8 •
•
•
•
• 120 00H
241 FFH 242 FCH 243 00H 244 00H

- 151 -
 [Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 248). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
the following order (1 → 124).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as
data 0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

Notes
(1) With the same writable character set designated, character width and character height can be
designated for each writable character code. In other words, character size can be changed
for each character, thus saving memory.
(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the parameters
of horizontal spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top offset.
(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinates are at the above left when drawing because
the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)

- 152 -
 Notes (1) No matter what character set or character code is selected, no memory will be
wasted.
(2) When a new writable character is stored, Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC]
J1) must be transmitted.
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in SD card again if the Writable
Character Command ([ESC] XD) is transmitted, but memory will be consumed
with every storage. Memory can be efficiently used by sending the Format
Command ([ESC] JA) before storing.
(4) If SD card is used, and a label issue operation is performed after sending the Bit
Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD), the image buffer is cleared
automatically.
(5) When the storing operation stops after storing the writable character and logos,
the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about
10 seconds. In this case, when the SD card is used, the image buffer will be
cleared automatically.

Refer to Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

SD Card Format Command ([ESC] JA)

- 153 -
Examples Writable character set: 03
Writable character code 70H

Top
offset
22 dots

Char.
height
31 dots
Base line

Reference Reference
point point of next
char.

Left offset
Char. width 26 dots
2 dots
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing
30 dots

[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>
0001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]

* 30H = ”0”
31H = ”1”
32H = ”2”
33H = ”3”
34H = ”4”
35H = ”5”
36H = ”6”
37H = ”7”
38H = ”8”
39H = ”9”
3AH = ”:”
3BH = ”;”
3CH = ”<”
3DH = ”=”
3EH = ”>”
3FH = ”?”

- 154 -
6.3.23 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG

Function Draws graphic data.

Format [ESC] SG; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]
or
[ESC] SG0; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ffff, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Print origin of X-coordinate for drawing graphic data

Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Print origin of Y-coordinate for drawing graphic data
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: No. of graphic width dots
Fixed as 4 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
dddd: No. of graphic height dots
4 or 5 digits (in dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is
contained in the graphic data.)
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:
Resolution of graphic data: *only two types
0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.)
0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.)
e: Type of graphic data
[ESC] SG; -- command:
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
2: BMP file mode (monochrome bmp) Overwrite drawing
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) OR drawing
6: PCX file mode (monochrome pcx) Overwrite drawing
[ESC] SG0; -- command:
A: Printer driver compression mode Overwrite drawing
ffff: Data count (Effective only for [ESC] SG0; -- command)
Fixed as 4 digits
Represents the total number of bytes for the compressed graphic data by 32
bits in Hex.
Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295 bytes
(00H, 00H, 00H, 00H to FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH)
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data

- 155 -
Explanation (1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “6”, or “A” is selected, the graphic data is
drawn by overwriting the image buffer.
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying
out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates

Graphic
Effective Effective height dots
print length print length
Graphic
height dots
Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
Graphic width Graphic width coordinates
dots dots (0, 0)

Effective Effective
print width print width
X Y
0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Print direction: Printing bottom first] [Print direction: Printing top first]

- 156 -
Print origin of
coordinates Graphic width 19 dots
Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 33H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H •
•
•
•
•
Graphic •
height •
22 dots • 126 30H
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 30H 3 00H
4 00H 5 38H
•
•
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 •
63 00H
8 8 8 64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 132). (High order digit: “3”)
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in the following
order (1 → 66).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are
transmitted as data 0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic
height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

- 157 -
[When TOPIX compression mode is selected]

Range for length

First line Second line

Graphic data Length L1 L1

L2

L3

(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )

Ex. Length = 20 bytes: 00 14

(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L1
0: Not present
1: Present

512 dots 512 dots 512 dots

(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained
(of the L1 large block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L2
0: Not present
1: Present

64 dots 64 dots 64 dots

(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of
the L2 medium block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L3
0: Not present
1: Present

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1). The
alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).

* The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer
size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the
graphic width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte).

- 158 -
[When the printer driver compression mode is selected]

(1) For the [ESC] SG0; -- command, only “A: Printer driver compression mode” can be selected
for the type of graphic data. The parameter for the data count is attached after the
parameter for the type of graphic data. When the total number of data cannot be provided
by the printer driver, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H” should be specified for the number of graphic
data. However, in this case, the printer diver cannot support printing through a serial
interface (RS-232C).
(2) How to compress data
Compression is performed for every data of one line specified for the number of graphic
width dots.
The data is made up in units of 8 dots. A repeated value is encoded in 2 bytes. The first
byte is a numeric value n indicating that a value is repeated (-n + 1) times.
The range is between -127 and -1. The second byte is the repeated value.
If a value is not repeated the first byte is the numeric value m. The length of the values is
indicated in (m+1). The range of “m” is between 0 and 126. The length of the repetition of
the value and ”m” should not exceed 127 and 126, respectively.
If it exceeds the range, it should be divided into blocks of repetition.
When the same contents as the data for 1 line appear repeatedly in the next line and after,
the number of lines in which the same contents appear is encoded in 2 bytes. The first byte
is fixed as 127. The second byte indicates “N” times that the same contents are repeated.
Its range is between 1 and 255. “N” should not exceed 255. If it exceeds the range, the
data for the excess number of times should be compressed as the new data of 1 line, and
the remaining number of repetitions should be encoded.
[Example]
Data before being compressed (Width: 120 dots, Height: 300 lines)
Line No. Graphic data

1 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
2 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh

299 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh
300 AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh

Data after being compressed

Line No. Graphic data

1 FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh

2 to 256 7FH FFH
257 FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FDh FFh
258 to 300 7FH 2BH
FDh = -3
-(-3) + 1 = 4
FFh is repeated 4 times.
03h = 3
3+1=4
4-byte data (BBh CCh DDh EEh) without
repetition
FAh = -6
-(-6) + 1 = 7
AAh is repeated 7 times.

- 159 -
Notes (1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the
graphic data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set
Command ([ESC] D).
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must
also be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective
print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as
the above.
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm.
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.33 mm in the X direction with
respect to the designated print origin of the X-coordinate.
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly
developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with
respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4
bits occurs.

[Effective print area] [mm]

Model 203 dpi 300 dpi
Item Issue mode Batch Strip Cutter Batch Strip Cutter
Min. 13 13
Effective print width
Max. 108± 0.2 105.7± 0.2
Min. 6 21.4 17.4 6 21.4 17.4
Label
Effective print Max. 995 148.2 991 453.2 148.2 449.2
length Min. 8 --- 25.4 10 --- 25.4
Tag
Max. 997 --- 997 455.2 --- 455.2

- 160 -
Examples
10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??
>000??>0007? <0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
* 30H = “0” 38H = “8”
31H = “1” 39H = “9”
32H = “2” 3AH = “:”
33H = “3” 3BH = “;”
34H = “4” 3CH = “<”
35H = “5” 3DH = “=”
36H = “6” 3EH = “>”
37H = “7” 3FH = “?”

- 161 -
[TOPIX compression mode]
10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30

Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09
(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line)
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20
(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line)
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line) (13th line)
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)

- 162 -
6.3.24 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO

Function Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.

(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in SD card,
or flash ROM on the CPU board.)

Format [ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number to be used for saving in the SD card or calling
01 to 99
dddddddd: Ignore
Sb: Drive in which the PC interface command is stored
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: SD card (Option)
2: SD card (Option)
c: Status response at save time
0: No status response made
1: Status response made

Explanation (1) When the PC interface command is stored in the SD card, directory “PCSAVE” is
created, and then the directory “Specified file name. PCS” is created under the
“PCSAVE” directory level.

Notes (1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the
following will be saved into the SD card.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• SD card Format Command ([ESC] JA)
(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time.

Refer to • Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• SD card Format Command ([ESC] JA)

Examples [ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

- 163 -
6.3.25 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP

Function Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.

Format [ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Note If the storing operation is not continued after storing the PC interface command, the
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this
case, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.

Refer to Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)

- 164 -
6.3.26 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND [ESC] XQ

Function Calls PC interface commands saved in SD card, or flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number of the file to be called from SD card

01 to 99
Sb: Drive from which the command is called
b: Drive
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board
1: SD card (Option)
2: SD card (Option)
c: Status response when the data is called up
0: No status response made
1: Status response made
d: Auto call at power on time
L: Auto call (Always call 01 file with Auto call. Refer to Section 4.1.2 for how
to cancel this function.)
M: No auto call

Notes (1) If the relevant save identifier is not found, an error will result.
(2) However, if no save number subject to auto call is found with the option for auto
call at power on time selected, the option for no auto call will be selected causing
no error.
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command in auto call at power on
time by the Saved Data Call Command, a command error will result. After an
error has occurred, the power must be turned off. The option for no auto call is
selected when the power is turned on again.
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data
Call Command is sent after the Save Terminate command.

Refer to • Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)

• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Examples [ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

- 165 -
6.3.27 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

Explanation The printer is returned to the same state as when the power was turned on. When the
printer receives this command during printing, it returns to its initial state after issuing
the label which is being printed. The next command must not be sent while the printer
is performing initial processing after this command is transmitted.

Notes (1) The Reset Command is effective in serial interface (RS-232C), parallel port, USB
port or socket communications.
(2) When the printer receives a command in system mode, only the Reset Command
can be processed and any other command cannot be processed.
(3) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, the error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in system mode.
(4) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed until the
printer receives the data specified for the type of data.

Example [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

- 166 -
6.3.28 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS

Function Sends the printer status to the host computer.

Format [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

Explanation This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of “status
response/no status response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer status,
and indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining count
of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be
printed is transmitted.

Notes (1) This command is available only for the RS-232C, USB interfaces and socket
communications.
(2) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.

Example [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

- 167 -
 6.3.29 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host computer.

Format [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Explanation This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of the
receive buffer regardless of the setting of “status response/no status response.” The
status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status only.
The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently being printed.
No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. Free space of the
receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is returned to the host.

Status Format (23 bytes)

SOH 01H
Indicates the top of the status block.
STX 02H
3XH
Status Detailed status
3XH
Status type 33H Indicates the status requested by the WB command.
3XH
Remaining 3XH
Remaining number of labels to be issued.
issue count 3XH
3XH
3XH Total number of bytes of the status block.
Length “30H30H”(0) ~ “39H39H”(99)
3XH
Note: In case of this status format (23 bytes), This is “32H33H”.
3XH
3XH Free space of receive buffer
Free space of
3XH “30H30H30H30H30H”(0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)
receive buffer
3XH Note: The maximum value must be the receive buffer capacity.
3XH
3XH
3XH Receive buffer capacity
Receive buffer
3XH “30H30H30H30H30H” (0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)
capacity
3XH Note: The maximum value differs depending on the models.
3XH
CR 0DH
Indicates the end of the status block.
LF 0AH

- 168 -
 Notes (1) This command is available only for the RS-232C, USB interfaces and socket
communications.
(2) The printer returns the status only for the interface which sent this command to
the host.
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not
processed until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

- 169 -
6.3.30 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV

Function Sends information such as the program version of the printer.

Format [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The format of the program version data (total 27 bytes of data) to be returned to
the host is as follows.

SOH 01H
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of program:
“2” 32H 9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“3” 33H
“B” 42H
“-“ 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “V” 56H Model:
“4” 34H 7 bytes of ASCII code indicating model
“D” 44H
SP 20H
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

ETX 03H Version

EOT 04H
CR 0DH
LF 0AH

(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of
the command previously sent is completed, the next command is not processed.
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the
program version data may not be returned immediately.

Notes (1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.

- 170 -
6.3.31 SD CARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WI

Function Sends information regarding the use of the memory board to the host.

Format [ESC] WI; a, b [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Drive
1: Slot 1 SD card (Option)
2: Slot 1 SD card (Option)
b: Information to be acquired
A: Free space
B: Bitmap
C: Stored PC command save file
D: TrueType

Explanation (1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:

A: Free space

SOH STX “A” Slot Free space (Kbyte) ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 41H xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Free space (in units of Kbytes):

000000 (KB) to 999999 (KB)
Slot:
“1” (31H): Slot 1
When the memory board is not inserted into a specified slot, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H,
00H, 00H” is returned for the free spaces.
B: Writable character list
Storage information for writable character
SOH STX “B” Slot (55 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 42H xxH “0”/“1” “0”/“1” ········ “0”/“1” “0”/“1” 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Writable character No. 55

Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 54
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 02
Stored/Not stored
Writable character No. 01
Stored/Not stored
Slot
“1” (31H): Slot 1 “0” (30H): Not stored
“1” (31H): Stored
If only one writable character is stored, information of the writable character No. is set to
“1” (Stored). The storage information of a specified character code can be acquired by
using the memory board Stored Writable Character Information Acquire Command
([ESC] WG).
The storage information for the writable character has a total of 55 bytes. The writable
character No. is assigned from 01 to 40, and from 51 to 55. Therefore, bytes to which
Nos. 41 to 50 are assigned are sure to be set to “0” (30H). When the memory board is
not inserted in the specified slot, “00H” for the storage information for the writable
character is returned.

- 171 -
 C: Stored PC command save file

SOH STX “C” Slot Stored PC command save file name ETX EOT CR LF
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

File name (including expansion):

Slot: “00H” should be placed between file
“1” (31H): Slot 1 names.

In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored PC command save
file name.
There is no file.
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.
D: Stored True Type Font file

SOH STX “D” Slot Stored PC command save file name ETX EOT CR LF
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

File name (including expansion):

Slot: “00H” should be placed between file
“1” (31H): Slot 1 names.

In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored True Type Font file
name.
There is no file.
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.

(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of
the command previously sent is completed, this command is not processed.
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the
program version data may not be returned immediately.

Note (1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C), USB or LAN.
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.

- 172 -
6.3.32 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND [ESC] IG

Function Sets the printer information.

Format [ESC] IG; aaa --- aaabbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa --- aaa: Model name (Fixed as 20 digits)

20H to 7FH of ASCII codes
bbb --- bbb: Serial No. (Fixed as 11digits)
20H to 7FH of ASCII codes

Explanation (1) The model name and serial No. of the printer can be optionally stored. The
character codes which can be set in each item are 20H to 7FH. If any code
other than these is used, it is replaced with the space code.
(2) The printer information has already been set when shipped.
(3) The stored printer information is backed up in memory and is kept even if the
power is turned off.
(4) This stored information should be printed on test print.

Examples The following information is stored in the printer.

Model name: B-EV4D-GS14-QM-R
Serial No.: 2303A000001

[ESC] IG; [42H] [2DH] [45H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [34H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [2DH]

[52H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H]

[31H] [LF] [NUL]

Refer to Printer Information Request Command ([ESC] IR)

- 173 -
6.3.33 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] IR

Function Retrieves the printer information.

Format [ESC] IR [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The model name and serial No. set by the Printer Information Store Command
([ESC] IG) are retrieved
[Information field]

Model name Serial No.

20 bytes 11 bytes

Examples The following information is stored in the printer.

Model name: B-EV4D-GS14-QM-R
Serial No.: 2303A000001

Model name: [42H] [2DH] [45H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [34H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [2DH]

[52H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H]

Serial No.: [32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [31H]

Refer to Printer Information Store Command ([ESC] IG)

- 174 -
6.3.34 IP ADDRESS SET COMMAND [ESC] IP

Function Sets the IP address to be required for the network connection.

Format [ESC] IP; a, bbb, ccc, ddd, eee [LF] [NUL]

Term a: IP address to be set

2: Printer IP address (Initial value: 192.168.10.20)
3: Gateway IP address (Initial value: 0.0.0.0)
4: Subnet mask (Initial value: 255.255.255.0)
bbb: First 8 bits
000 to 255
ccc: Second 8 bits
000 to 255
ddd: Third 8 bits
000 to 255
eee: Last 8 bits
000 to 255
Examples To set the printer IP address to “157.69.9.78”.
[ESC] IP; 2, 157, 069, 009, 078 [LF] [NUL]

- 175 -
6.3.35 SOCKET COMMUNICATION PORT SET COMMAND [ESC] IS

Function Enables or disables the socket communication, and sets the communication port
number to be used.

Format [ESC] IS; a, bbbb [LF] [NUL]

Term a: 0: Socket communication is disabled.

1: Socket communication is enabled.
bbbbb: Port number (It must be set in 5 digits.)
00000 to 65535
Examples To enable the socket communication and set the port number to “8000”.
[ESC] IS; 1, 08000 [LF] [NUL]

- 176 -
6.3.36 DHCP FUNCTION SET COMMAND [ESC] IH

Function Enables or disables the DHCP function, and sets the DHCP client ID.

Format [ESC] IH; a, bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb [LF] [NUL]

Term a: 0: DHCP function is disabled.

1: DHCP function is enabled.
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb:
DHCP client ID (16-byte data is described in 32-byte hexadecimal.)

Explanation “FFH” in the client ID is assumed as a terminator. Therefore, “FFH” must not be
used in data.
If “FFH” is specified as the first byte of the DHCP client ID, the printer assumes the
DHCP client ID has not been specified. So the printer uses the MAC address as
the DHCP client ID instead.
Examples To enable the DHCP function and set the DHCP client ID to “12H56HCDH”.
[ESC] IH; 1, 1256CDFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF[LF] [NUL]

- 177 -
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND [ESC] Z2; 1

Function Sets each parameter on the printer.

Format [ESC] Z2; 1, abcdefghijklmnopqqrst(uvw) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Character code selection

0: PC-850
1: PC-852
2: PC-857
3: PC-8
4: PC-851
5: PC-855
6: PC-1250
7: PC-1251
8: PC-1252
9: PC-1253
A: PC-1254
B: PC-1257
C: LATIN9
D: Arabic
b: Font “0” selection
0: 0 (without slash)
1: 0 (with slash)
c: RS-232C communication speed
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
5: 57600 bps
6: 115200 bps
d: RS-232C data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
e: Stop bit length
0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
f: RS-232C parity check (Not initialized by parameter clearance by key operation)
0: NONE (QM)
1: EVEN (JA/CSG)
2: ODD

- 178 -
g: RS-232C transmission control
0: XON/XOFF protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
1: READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
2: XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
3: XON/XOFF protocol:
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is
turned OFF)
4: RTS protocol
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the
power is turned OFF)
h: Destination selection (Not initialized by parameter clearance by key operation)
Note: When JA or CSG is selected, a character assigned to “5CH” of the all
character code tables will become “¥” instead of “\”, and Japanese characters
are supported by the bitmap fonts.
0: QM
1: JA
2: CSG
3: Ignore
4: Ignore
5: Ignore
6: Ignore
i: Forward feed standby after an issue
0: OFF
1: ON
j: Head up operation after a label is cut
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
k: Ribbon saving system
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
l: Type of control code
0: Automatic selection
1: ESC, LF, NUL mode
2: {, |, } mode
m: Ribbon type selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
n: Strip status selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore

- 179 -
 o: [FEED] key function
0: FEED: Feeds one label.
1: PRINT: Prints data from the image buffer on one label.
p: Kanji code selection
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
qq: Euro code setting
*1
“20” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code)
r: Automatic head broken dots check
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
s: Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
t: Web printer function setting
0: Ignore
1: Ignore
u: Automatic home position detection (Omissible and not initialized by parameter
clearance by key operation)
0: OFF (Default)
1: ON
v: Automatic sensor calibration setting (Omissible and not initialized by parameter
clearance by key operation)
0: OFF (Default)
1: ON with current sensor when power on
w: Printer model setting (Omissible and not initialized by parameter clearance by
key operation)
0: B-EV4D
1: B-EV4T

Explanation (1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) The parameters set by this command become effective when the power is turned
on.
*1: Hex codes to be set are expressed in 2 bytes of ASCII code as shown below:
Example 1: To set 36H: ”36” (33H, 36H)
Example 2: To set 42H: ”42” (34H, 32H)
Example 3: To set FFH: ”FF” (46H, 46H)

- 180 -
(3) When the automatic home position detection is set to ON, the media must be set
as follows. Otherwise, the printer cannot detect a home position correctly.
(The printer basically performs the automatic home position detection during the
cut issue.)

st
Set the media so that the 2nd black mark is positioned before the
1 black mark print head position.

Cut position Black mark sensor

(The sensor should be positioned at
the center of the media width.)

Print head position

(4) When the automatic home position detection is set to ON, the printer operation
differs depending on the printer statuses.
<#1> When the printer power is turned OFF and back to ON or when the top cover is
opened and closed.
1) Set the media so that the 2nd black mark is positioned before the print head
position.

1 2

Cut position
Black mark sensor

Print head position

2) When the power is turned on or the top cover is closed, the printer feeds the
media in the reverse direction until the black mark sensor detects the 2nd black
mark. (If the 2nd black mark is not detected while printer feeds a half of the
specified media length, a paper jam error results.)

Feed direction
1 2

Cut position
Black mark sensor

Print head position

- 181 -
 3) When the 2nd black mark is detected, the printer further performs a reverse
feed for the distance equivalent to “35 mm minus the distance between the
print head position and the black mark sensor” so that the top edge of the
media is positioned at the print head position.
(If the 2nd black mark is not detected even though the printer has performed a
35-mm or more reverse feed, a paper jam occurs.)
Feed direction

1 2

Cut position

Print head position

4) The printer waits for data on the above condition.

5) Upon receiving data, the printer starts printing. (The 2nd black mark is ignored
during printing or feeding.)

<#2> When the top cover is opened and closed after clearing an error (paper jam, no
paper, or ribbon error).
1) After clearing an error (paper jam, non paper, or ribbon error), set the media
so that the 2nd black mark is positioned before the print head position, then
close the top cover.

1 2

Cut position
Black mark sensor

Print head position

2) When the FEED key is pressed, the printer feeds the media in the reverse
direction until the black mark sensor detects the 2nd black mark. (If the 2nd
black mark is not detected while printer feeds a half of the specified media
length, a paper jam error results.)

Feed direction
1 2

Cut position
Black mark sensor

Print head position

- 182 -
 3) When the 2nd black mark is detected, the printer further performs a reverse
feed for the distance equivalent to “35 mm minus the distance between the
print head position and the black mark sensor” so that the top edge of the
media is positioned at the print head position.
(If the 2nd black mark is not detected even though the printer has performed a
35-mm or more reverse feed, a paper jam occurs.)

Feed direction

1 2

Cut position

Print head position

<#3> When the printer does not receive any data within 1 sec. after the last issue and
the power is turned off and back to on without opening/closing the top cover.
1) After cutting the media, the printer performs a reverse feed so that the top
edge of the media is positioned at the print head position.
Feed direction

1 2

Cut position

Print head position

2) When the printer does not receive next data within 1 sec. and the power is
turned off without opening/closing the top cover, a reverse feed will not be
performed as the media is already positioned at the print head position.

- 183 -
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] Z2; 2

Function Sets various fine adjustment values on the printer.

Format [ESC] Z2; 2, abbbcdddeffghhhijjkllmnnoppqqrrss(tt) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a feed length fine
adjustment is to be made.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
bbb: Feed length fine adjustment value
Ignore
c: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position (or strip
position) fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ddd: Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position)
Ignore
e: Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ff: Back feed length fine adjustment value
Ignore
g: Indicates the direction, positive or negative, in which the X-coordinate fine
adjustment is to be made. (Not initialized by parameter clearance by key
operation)
+: Positive direction
-: Negative direction
hhh: X-coordinate fine adjustment value (Not initialized by parameter clearance by key
operation)
000 to 995 (in units of 0.5 mm) *1
i: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the thermal transfer print
mode.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
jj: Print density fine adjustment value (for the thermal transfer print mode)
Ignore
k: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the direct thermal print
mode.
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
ll: Print density fine adjustment value (for the direct thermal print mode)
Ignore

- 184 -
 m: Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
-: Ignore
nn: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon rewind motor voltage
Ignore
o: Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
+: Ignore
-: Ignore
pp: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon back tension motor voltage
Ignore
qq: Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
Ignore
rr: Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value
Ignore
ss: Sensor sensitivity adjustment value for transmissive sensor (Not initialized by
parameter clearance by key operation)
00 to 31

tt: Sensor sensitivity adjustment value for reflective sensor (Omissible, If omitted,
the reflective sensor sensitivity is not changed. Not initialized by parameter
clearance by key operation)
00 to 31

Explanation (1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command become effective when
the power is turned on or the printer is reset.

(3) Sensor sensitivity adjustment value

This value is used to adjust the sensor sensitivity. Available values are from 00 to
63 is the lowest sensitivity, while 63 is the highest sensitivity.
Normally, the sensor sensitivity can be set automatically when calibrating the
sensor. This value can be seen from the self-test printing.
For example)
SENSOR TRANSMISSIVE [17]
This means current sensor type is transmissive sensor and sensitivity level is 17. If
the automatic sensor calibration cannot register label gap or black mark, use this
parameter to adjust sensitivity manually.
*1: The value can be set in units of 0.1 mm. However, the value which is actually set
on the printer is in units of 0.5 mm. When a value from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it
is actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm
is set, it is actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm.

- 185 -
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 (zero)

Function Resets the printer.

Format [ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]

Explanation • This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.
• Some values in the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) and the Fine Adjustment
Value Set Command ([ESC Z2;2]), will become effective when the printer is initialized.
This command should be sent after the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) or Fine
Adjustment Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2) is sent.

- 186 -
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION
(1) Automatic Selection
This printer automatically selects [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H) or {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH)
as an interface command control code. After the power is turned on, the program checks the data
from the host for [ESC] and { and assumes the data whichever has been sent first to be a control
code.
For example, if [ESC] is sent first after the power is turned on, [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL] becomes a
control code, and if { is sent first, { . | . } becomes a control code. Control code selection is made
for every command. If the first command is [ESC] ~ [LF] [NUL], followed by [ESC], the control code
becomes [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL], and if it is followed by { , the control code for the next command
becomes { . | . }. When { . | . } is a control code, the data of 00H to 1FH in { ~ | } is ignored.
However, the data of 00H to 1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or
Writable Character Command in hexadecimal mode. When { . | . } is a control code, { . | . } cannot
be used in the data of the Data Command or Display Command.

Power ON

Read received data

No
<Received data ESC?>

Yes No
<Received data { ?>
Yes

Assume control code Assume control code Discard read

to be ESC. LF. NUL to be { . | . } data

Command processing

(2) Manual Selection (ESC. LF. NUL)

The control code of the command is [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H), and the control code
selection is not performed.
(3) Manual Selection ({ . | . })
The control code of the command is {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH), and the control code selection is not
performed. Data of 00H to 1FH is ignored and discarded in this mode. However, data of 00H to
1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or Writable Character Command in
hexadecimal mode. { . | . } cannot be used in the data of the Data Command or Display Command.

- 187 -
8. ERROR PROCESSING
If the printer detects any of the following errors, it will display the error message (LED), makes status
response (serial interface, parallel interface and USB interface), and stops its operation.

8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS

(1) Command Errors
An error results if a command length error, command transmission sequence error, command
format error or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the command. An error results if
the Format Command of a field is not transmitted and its Data Command is transmitted. When
attempting to call a PC Save Command of a save identifier which is not saved, an error results.
An undefined command is not detected as an error, and data is discarded until [NUL] or [}] is
received.
(2) Hardware Errors
An error results if a framing error, overrun error or parity error is found during data reception
when using the serial interface (RS-232C).
* At the moment when a command error or hardware error occurs, the printer shows the error
message and makes status response before stopping. The Status Request Command and
Reset Command only can be processed and other commands are not processed. When the
printer is restored by the [RESTART] key, the printer enters the initial state which is obtained
after the power is turned on.

8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING

(1) Feed Jam
c When the relation between the programmed label (or tag) pitch (A) and the label (or tag) pitch
detected by the sensor (B) is not indicated by the following formula, an error will result: (A) ×
50% ≤ (B) ≤ (A) × 150%
• A paper jam has occurred during paper feed.
• The paper is not placed properly.
• The actual label does not match the type of the sensor.
• The sensor position is not aligned with the black mark.
• The actual label size does not meet the designated label length.
• No label-to-label gap is detected due to preprint.
• The sensor is not thoroughly adjusted.
(The sensor is not adjusted for the label to be used.)
d If the stripped label does not cover the strip sensor when printing or feeding is completed in
strip mode, an error will result.

- 188 -
(2) Cutter Error
• Cutter
When the cutter does not move from the cutter home position 50 msec or more after the cutter
solenoid is driven, an error will result.
The cutter moves from the home position, however, it does not return to the home position after
500 msec.
(3) Label End
c When the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state in 10 mm
continuously, an error will result.
d If the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state when an issue, feed
and ejection is attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.
The following cases are effective only when the issue speed is set to A or B by an Issue
Command.
e When the transmissive or reflective sensor detects a no-paper level at the time an issue, a
feed, or an ejection of labels is attempted while the printer is stopped, an error results. (This is
not applicable to an automatic label set function at a power on time.)
f When the trasmissive or reflective sensor has detected consecutive 3-mm long no-paper level
at the completion of printing (or feeding) of the last label in a batch, an error results. (In this
case, a status “23”, which is different from a normal label end status “13”, will be sent to the
host.)

Detailed status
Printer status Automatic status Status request
transmission command

No label 13 13

When printing of the last label in a 23 23

batch is completed normally, the
printer has run out of the label roll.

(4) Head Open Error

If the head open sensor detects the open state when an issue, feed and ejection is attempted
in a printer stop state, an error will result.
(5) Thermal Head Excessive Temperature
When the thermal head temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high
temperature, an error will result.
(6) Ribbon Error
When the ribbon rotational speed, detected by the ribbon sensor, deviates from specification,
and error will result.
• A ribbon jam occurred
• The ribbon has been broken/torn.
• A ribbon is not installed.

- 189 -
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES
(1) Write Error
• An error has occurred in writing in the SD card.
(2) Format Error
• An erase error has occurred in formatting the SD card.
(3) Memory Full
• Storing is impossible because of the insufficient SD card capacity.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer indicates the error by the LED, makes status
response, then stops. The Status Request Command and Reset Command only can be
processed and other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [FEED] key is
impossible.

- 190 -
9. STATUS RESPONSE
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS

There are the following two kinds of status response functions.

(1) Status transmission function at the end of normal transmission and occurrence of an error
(auto status transmission)
If the option for “status response” has been selected, the printer sends status to the host
computer when the printer performs a feed or completes an issue normally (For batch/cut
mode: after the designated number of labels are printed, For strip mode: after one label is
printed). In the online mode, the head up/down status is sent to the host computer.
When each error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.
The remaining count in the status response indicates the remaining count of the batch
currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.
(2) Status transmission function by status request (Status Request Command)
Upon request to send status by the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest
status indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the option for “status
response/no status response” . The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the
batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is
transmitted. This command is not stored in the receive buffer and executed immediately
when it is received.
• Strip status
The strip status (05H) returned by the Status Request Command depends on the
parameter setting.
When the strip status parameter is set to “1”:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer
returns (00H).
When the strip status parameter is set to “2”:
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer
returns (05H).
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the strip
status (05H) is returned for both settings.

9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT

SOH STX Status Remaining count ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Remaining count
• 0000 ~ 9999
(Fixed as 0000 in save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (Status Request Command)
• “2” (32H) (Auto status transmission)
Detail status

- 191 -
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS

Detail Status
Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
Transmission Command

The top cover was closed in the online mode. 00 00

The top cover was opened in the online mode. 01 01
Operating (Analyzing command, drawing, printing, feeding) – 02
In pause – 04
Waiting for stripping – 05
A command error was found in analyzing the command. 06 06
A parity error, overrun error or framing error occurred 07 07
during communication by RS-232C
A paper jam occurred during paper feed. 11 11
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter. 12 12
The label has run out. 13 13
An attempt was made to feed or issue with the top cover 15 15
open.
(except the [FEED] key)
The stepping motor temperature has become excessively 16 16
high.
The thermal head temperature has become excessively 18 18
high.
The ribbon has run out. 21 21
An Abnormal condition has occurred in the encoder
The last label has been issued normally and the label has 23 23
run out.
A label issue is completed normally. 40 –
The feed has been terminated normally. 41 –
In writable character or – 55
PC command save mode
An error has occurred in writing data into the SD card. 50 50
An erase error has occurred in formatting the SD card. 51 51
Saving failed because of the insufficient capacity of the SD 54 54
card.
The SD card is being initialized. – 55
An EEPROM for back up cannot be read/written properly. 55 55

- 192 -
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE
Printer Status Output Signal
BUSY SELECT FAULT PE
In the online mode L H H L
In the online mode (communicating) L, H H H L
The top cover was opened in the online mode. – L L L
In a pause state – L L L
Data was set from the host with the receive buffer full. – H H L
After data was sent from the host with the receive buffer – H H L
full, some data is processed and room becomes
available.
Initialize process in execution – L L L
A command error has occurred in analyzing the – L L L
command.
A paper jam occurred during paper feed. – L L L
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter. – L L L
The label has run out. – L L H
A feed or an issue was attempted with the top cover – L L L
opened. (except the [FEED] key)
The stepping motor temperature has become – L L L
excessively high.
The thermal head temperature has become excessively – L L L
high.
The ribbon has run out. – L L L
An Abnormal condition has occurred in the encoder
The last label has been issued normally and the label L L H
has run out.
In writable character or PC command save mode – H H L
An error has occurred in writing data into the SD card. – L L L
An erase error has occurred in formatting the SD card. – L L L
Saving failed because of the insufficient capacity of the – L L L
SD card.
The SD card is being initialized. –
(Initialization is carried out for approximately 15
seconds)
A momentary power interruption has occurred. – L L L
An EEPROM for back-up cannot be read/written – L L L
properly.

- 193 -
 Printer Status Output Signal
BUSY SELECT FAULT PE
(a) A command has been fetched from an odd address. – L L L
(b) Word data has been accessed from a place other
than the boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from a place
other than the boundary of the long word data.
(d) An undefined command in a place other than the
delay slot has been decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot has been
decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the delay
slot has been decoded.

- 194 -
10. LED INDICATIONS
Restoration by Acceptance of
LED Indication [FEED] key while Status Request
No. Printer Status error state Reset
Yes/No Command
Green Red Orange Yes/No

1 In the online mode - Yes

★ In the online mode - Yes
(Communicating)
2 The top cover was opened in the online - Yes
mode.
3 ◎ In a pause state Yes Yes
4 A parity error, overrun error or framing Yes Yes
error has occurred during communication
by RS-232C.
5 ★ A paper jam occurred during paper feed. Yes Yes
6 ★ An abnormal condition occurred at the Yes Yes
cutter.
7 The label has run out. Yes Yes
8 ◎ A feed or an issue was attempted with the Yes Yes
top cover opened.
(except the [FEED] key)
9 ◎ ◎ The stepping motor temperature has No Yes
become excessively high.
10 ◎ ◎ The thermal head temperature has become No Yes
excessively high.
11 The ribbon has run out. Yes Yes
An abnormal condition has occurred in the
encoder
12 The last label has been issued normally Yes Yes
and the label has run out.
13 In writable character or PC - Yes
command save mode
14 An error has occurred in writing data into No Yes
the SD card.
15 An erase error has occurred in formatting No Yes
SD card.
16 Saving failed because of the insufficient No Yes
capacity of SD card.
17 ◎ SD card is being initialized. – –
(Initialization is carried out for
approximately 15 seconds)
18 An EEPROM for back-up cannot be No No
read/written properly.

- 195 -
 Restoration by Acceptance of
LED Indication [FEED] key while Status Request
No. Printer Status error state Reset
Yes/No Command
Green Red Orange Yes/No

19 (a) A command has been fetched from No No

an odd address.
(b) Word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the
word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed
from a place other than the boundary
of the long word data.
(d) An undefined command in a place
other than the delay slot has been
decoded.
(e) An undefined command in the delay
slot has been decoded.
(f) A command which rewrites the data
in the delay slot has been decoded.

NOTE 1: : On
◎ :Slow-speed Blinking (Interval: 1.0sec)
:Medium-speed Blinking (Interval: 0.5sec)
★ :Fast-speed Blinking (Interval: 0.2sec)
: Off

- 196 -
11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE
The followings are the character code tables. However, the characters which can be printed are
different according to the character type.

11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER

(Bit map font type: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N, O, P, Q, R)

(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô =
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á 1 Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º À Ã Î þ ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ The Euro code (B0H) can
be changed in the
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û •
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ²
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì g
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ ⎧
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ ⎭
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù º τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Θ • The Euro code (B0H) can
A : J Z j z è Ü Ω • be changed in the
*
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ n

D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g
F / ? O _ o Å ∫ » ∩

- 197 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í Ð ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u Á §
6 & 6 F V f v Â Í ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Ú ¨ The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ • be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | î ý
D – = M ] m } Ý
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « g
F / ? O _ o » ¤

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ª ß ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù À Ã Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ © Ï × °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨ The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û • be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì ³
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ ÿ ²
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ Ì g
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤ ´

- 198 -
(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ¨ The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z è Ü be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
C , < L \ l | î £
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g
F / ? O _ o »

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m } §
E . > N ^ n ~ « g
F / ? O _ o » ¤

- 199 -
(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ± Á á
2 ” 2 B R b r  â
3 # 3 C S c s Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨ ¸
9 ) 9 I Y i y © É é The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z Ú ú be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë ë
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î î
F / ? O _ o ß

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y © The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ ®
F / ? O _ o

- 200 -
(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨
9 ) 9 I Y i y © The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z ª be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m } ½
E . > N ^ n ~ ®
F / ? O _ o

- 201 -
(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ Í í ¹
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î î
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · × ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É é The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } ¨ ¯ ½
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾
F / ? O _ o ¸ Æ æ ß

- 202 -
(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t C Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z j z be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

- 203 -
11.2 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)
(1) PC-850, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~ ¥
F / ? O _ O

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M } ¥
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

- 204 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

- 205 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X ^ ˜
9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can
A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

(6) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

- 206 -
(7) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T C
5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y The Euro code (B0H) can

A * : J Z J Z
be changed in the
parameter set command.
B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

- 207 -
11.3 OCR-A (Bit map font type: S)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N ¥
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ¥
F / ? O o

- 208 -
(2) PC-8
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M ¥
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m } ¥
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 209 -
(3) PC-852
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 210 -
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 211 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X ^ ˜
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 212 -
(6) PC-1253
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p -
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 213 -
(7) LATIN9
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u ¥
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n
F / ? O o

- 214 -
11.4 OCR-B (Bit map font type: T)
(1) PC-850, PC-857
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N ¥
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0 -
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ ¥
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 215 -
(2) PC-8
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M ¥
E . > N
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m } ¥
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 216 -
(3) PC-852
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0 -
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 217 -
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 218 -
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254, LATIN9
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8 ˜
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5 ¥
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 ˜
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 219 -
(6) PC-1253
c 203-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

d 300-dpi print head model

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p 0
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1
2 " 2 B R b r 2
3 # 3 C S c s 3
4 $ 4 D T d t 4
5 % 5 E U e u 5 ¥
6 & 6 F V f v 6
7 ' 7 G W g w 7
8 ( 8 H X h x 8
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.

- 220 -
11.5 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B)
(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª ã µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ² be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ ⎧
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ ⎭
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù º τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Θ •
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Ω •
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ n
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2 be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o Å ∫ » ∩

- 221 -
(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í C ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u §
6 & 6 F V f v ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | î
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o » ¤

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ª ß ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ã µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ÿ 2 be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤

- 222 -
(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü C ±
2 " 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
C , < L \ l | î £
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o »

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } § be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ « g parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o » ¤

- 223 -
(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C á
2 " 2 B R b r â
3 # 3 C S c s ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ Î parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o ß

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o

- 224 -
(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y é ù
A * : J Z j z ª ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß ï ÿ

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z ª
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o

- 225 -
(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } ½ be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o Æ æ ß

- 226 -
(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ì ü
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } Í
be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ î parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
The Euro code (B0H) can
D – = M ] m } be changed in the
E . > N ^ n ~ parameter set command.
F / ? O _ o

- 227 -
11.6 KANJI (16X16, 24X24, 32X32)
(1) JIS8 (Half-size characters)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p - ﾀ ﾐ
1 ! 1 A Q a q ｡ ｱ ﾁ ﾑ
2 ” 2 B R b r ｢ ｲ ﾂ ﾒ
3 # 3 C S c s ｣ ｳ ﾃ ﾓ
4 $ 4 D T d t ､ ｴ ﾄ ﾔ
5 % 5 E U e u ･ ｵ ﾅ ﾕ
6 & 6 F V f v ｦ ｶ ﾆ ﾖ
7 ’ 7 G W g w ｧ ｷ ﾇ ﾗ
8 ( 8 H X h x ｨ ｸ ﾈ ﾘ
9 ) 9 I Y i y ｩ ｹ ﾉ ﾙ
A * : J Z j z ｪ ｺ ﾊ ﾚ
B + ; K [ k { ｫ ｻ ﾋ ﾛ
C , < L \ l | ｬ ｼ ﾌ ﾜ
D – = M ] m } ｭ ｽ ﾍ ﾝ
E . > N ˆ n ~ ｮ ｾ ﾎ ﾞ
F / ? O _ o ｯ ｿ ﾏ ﾟ

(2) Shift JIS

Omitted

- 228 -
(3) JIS Hexadecimal

- 229 -
- 230 -
- 231 -
- 232 -
- 233 -
- 234 -
11.7 TrueType FONT
(1) PC-850

(2) PC-8

- 235 -
(3) PC-852

(4) PC-857

- 236 -
(5) PC-851

(6) PC-855

- 237 -
(7) PC-1250

(8) PC-1251

- 238 -
(9) PC-1252

(10) PC-1253

- 239 -
(11) PC-1254

(12) PC-1257

- 240 -
(13) LATIN9

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p ° À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t Š Ä Ô ä ô
C Z
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Š
S ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x s Š
Š z È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Œ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } - œ Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Ÿ Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ

(14) Arabic

- 241 -
12. BAR CODE TABLE
(1) WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC) (2) CODE39 (Standard)
ITF, MSI, UCC/EAN128, Industrial 2 of 5

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 SP 0 P
1 1 1 1 A Q
2 2 2 2 B R
3 3 3 3 C S
4 4 4 $ 4 D T
5 5 5 % 5 E U
6 6 6 6 F V
7 7 7 7 G W
8 8 8 8 H X
9 9 9 9 I Y
A A * J Z
B B + K
C C L
D D – M
E E • N
F F / O

(3) CODE39 (Full ASCII)

[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 " 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B /K %F K %K +K %P
C , < L \ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o F /O %J O %O +O %T

- 242 -
(4) NW-7

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0
1 1 A a
2 2 B b
3 3 C c
4 $ 4 D d t
5 5 e
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A * :
B +
C
D –
E • n
F /

(5) CODE93
[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 " 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B + %F K %K +K %P
C , < L \ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o F / %J O %O +O %T

- 243 -
(6) CODE128
[Transfer code]

– – 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v [Drawing code]
7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x Value Code Table
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to transmit control code data:

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to transmit special codes:
Value
30 (Character >) → >0
95 → >1
96 → >2
97 → >3
98 → >4
99 → >5
100 → >6
101 → >7
102 → >8
e Designation of start code:
START (CODE A) → >7
START (CODE B) → >6
START (CODE C) → >5

- 244 -
Value Code Table

VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE
A B C A B C A B C
0 SP SP 00 36 D D 36 72 BS h 72
1 ! ! 01 37 E E 37 73 HT i 73
2 " " 02 38 F F 38 74 LF j 74
3 # # 03 39 G G 39 75 VT k 75
4 $ $ 04 40 H H 40 76 FF l 76
5 % % 05 41 I I 41 77 CR m 77
6 & & 06 42 J J 42 78 SO n 78
7 ' ' 07 43 K K 43 79 SI o 79
8 ( ( 08 44 L L 44 80 DLE p 80
9 ) ) 09 45 M M 45 81 DC1 q 81
10 * * 10 46 N N 46 82 DC2 r 82
11 + + 11 47 O O 47 83 DC3 s 83
12 , , 12 48 P P 48 84 DC4 t 84
13 – – 13 49 Q Q 49 85 NAK u 85
14 . . 14 50 R R 50 86 SYN v 86
15 / / 15 51 S S 51 87 ETB w 87
16 0 0 16 52 T T 52 88 CAN x 88
17 1 1 17 53 U U 53 89 EM y 89
18 2 2 18 54 V V 54 90 SUB z 90
19 3 3 19 55 W W 55 91 ESC { 91
20 4 4 20 56 X X 56 92 FS ¦ 92
21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57 93 GS } 93
22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58 94 RS ~ 94
23 7 7 23 59 [ [ 59 95 US DEL 95
24 8 8 24 60 \ \ 60 96 FNC3 FNC3 96
25 9 9 25 61 ] ] 61 97 FNC2 FNC2 97
26 : : 26 62 ^ ^ 62 98 SHIFT SHIFT 98
27 ; ; 27 63 _ _ 63 99 CODE C CODE C 99
28 < < 28 64 NUL ` 64 100 CODE B FNC4 CODE B
29 = = 29 65 SOH a 65 101 FNC4 CODE A CODE A
30 > > 30 66 STX b 66 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
31 ? ? 31 67 ETX c 67
32 @ @ 32 68 EOT d 68 103 START CODE A
33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69 104 START CODE B
34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70 105 START CODE C
35 C C 35 71 BEL g 71

- 245 -
(7) Data Matrix
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.

Format ID Code Details

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space
2 Letters A to Z space
3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space
5 ASCII (7-bit) 00H to 7FH
6 ISO (8-bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji)

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 246 -
(8) PDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.

Mode Code Details

EXC mode Alphanumerics, symbol 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ”
# $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - .
/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^
_ ` { | } ~ CR HT
Binary/ASCII Plus Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
mode Character Set
Numeric Numerics 0 to 9
Compaction mode

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 247 -
(9) MicroPDF417
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.

Mode Details
Upper case letters, A to Z, space
space
Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
Character Set
Numerics 0 to 9

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 248 -
(10) QR code
When manual mode is selected in the Format Command
y Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

y Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

y Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However, since
the data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used should be designated
by selecting the mode.

Mode Code Details

N Numerals 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:

Data to be printed

[Transfer code for QR code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

- 249 -
 c How to send control code data
NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

Examples of data designation for QR code

c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode : 123456
Kanji mode : Kanji data
Binary mode : a i u e o
Alphanumeric and symbol mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o ,AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of data Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed strings printed

Designation of mode

f Automatic mode
When the same data as e above is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o A B C
Data to be printed

- 250 -
(11) Postal code
Customer bar code POSTNET

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P 0 0
1 1 A Q 1 1
2 2 B R 2 2
3 3 C S 3 3
4 4 D T 4 4
5 5 E U 5 5
6 6 F V 6 6
7 7 G W 7 7
8 8 H X 8 8
9 9 I Y 9 9
A J Z A
B K B
C L C
D – M D
E N E
F O F

RM4SCC KIX CODE

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P 0 0 P p
1 1 A Q 1 1 A Q a q
2 2 B R 2 2 B R b r
3 3 C S 3 3 C S c s
4 4 D T 4 4 D T d t
5 5 E U 5 5 E U e u
6 6 F V 6 6 F V f v
7 7 G W 7 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X 8 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y 9 9 I Y i y
A J Z A J Z j z
B K B K k
C L C L l
D M D M m
E N E N n
F O F O o

* “(” or “)” can be designated only as a start/stop code.

These should not be entered in data.
If these are entered between data, no bar code is drawn.

- 251 -
(12) MaxiCode
Symbol Character Code Set A Code Set B Code Set C Code Set D Code Set E
Value
Decimal Binary Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal
0 000000 CR 13 ‘ 96 À 192 à 224 NUL 0
1 000001 A 65 a 97 Á 193 á 225 SOH 1
2 000010 B 66 b 98 Â 194 â 226 STX 2
3 000011 C 67 c 99 Ã 195 ã 227 ETX 3
4 000100 D 68 d 100 Ä 196 ä 228 EOT 4
5 000101 E 69 e 101 Å 197 å 229 ENQ 5
6 000110 F 70 f 102 Æ 198 æ 230 ACK 6
7 000111 G 71 g 103 Ç 199 ç 231 BEL 7
8 001000 H 72 h 104 È 200 è 232 BS 8
9 001001 I 73 i 105 É 201 é 233 HT 9
10 001010 J 74 j 106 Ê 202 ê 234 LF 10
11 001011 K 75 k 107 Ë 203 ë 235 VT 11
12 001100 L 76 l 108 Ì 204 ì 236 FF 12
13 001101 M 77 m 109 Í 205 í 237 CR 13
14 001110 N 78 n 110 Î 206 î 238 SO 14
15 001111 O 79 o 111 Ï 207 ï 239 SI 15
16 010000 P 80 p 112 Ð 208 ð 240 DLE 16
17 010001 Q 81 q 113 Ñ 209 ñ 241 DC1 17
18 010010 R 82 r 114 Ò 210 ò 242 DC2 18
19 010011 S 83 s 115 Ó 211 ó 243 DC3 19
20 010100 T 84 t 116 Ô 212 ô 244 DC4 20
21 010101 U 85 u 117 Õ 213 õ 245 NAK 21
22 010110 V 86 v 118 Ö 214 ö 246 SYN 22
23 010111 W 87 w 119 × 215 ÷ 247 ETB 23
24 011000 X 88 x 120 Ø 216 ø 248 CAN 24
25 011001 Y 89 y 121 Ù 217 ù 249 EM 25
26 011010 Z 90 z 122 Ú 218 ú 250 SUB 26
27 011011 [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC]
28 011100 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 [Pad]
29 011101 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 [Pad]
30 011110 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 ESC 27
31 011111 [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS]
32 100000 Space 32 ( 123 Û 219 û 251 FS 28
33 100001 [Pad] [Pad] Ü 220 ü 252 GS 29
34 100010 “ 34 ) 125 Ý 221 ý 253 RS 30
35 100011 # 35 ~ 126 Þ 222 þ 254 US 31
36 100100 $ 36 DEL 127 ß 223 ÿ 255 {C159} 159
37 100101 % 37 ; 59 ª 170 ¡ 161 NBSP 160
38 100110 & 38 < 60 ¬ 172 ¨ 168 ¢ 162
39 100111 ‘ 39 = 61 ± 177 « 171 £ 163
40 101000 ( 40 > 62 ² 178 ¯ 175 ¤ 164
41 101001 ) 41 ? 63 ³ 179 ° 176 ¥ 165
42 101010 ” 42 [ 91 181 ' 180 166
43 101011 + 43 \ 92 ¹ 185 • 183 § 167
44 101100 , 44 ] 93 º 186 184 © 169
45 101101 - 45 ^ 94 ¼ 188 » 187 SHY 173
46 101110 . 46 _ 95 ½ 189 ¿ 191 ® 174
47 101111 / 47 Space 32 ¾ 190 {C138} 138 ¶ 182
48 110000 0 48 , 44 {C128} 128 {C139} 139 {C149} 149
49 110001 1 49 . 46 {C129} 129 {C140} 140 {C150} 150
50 110010 2 50 / 47 {C130} 130 {C141} 141 {C151} 151
51 110011 3 51 : 58 {C131} 131 {C142} 142 {C152} 152
52 110100 4 52 @ 64 {C132} 132 {C143} 143 {C153} 153
53 110101 5 53 ! 33 {C133} 133 {C144} 144 {C154} 154
54 110110 6 54 | 124 {C134} 134 {C145} 145 {C155} 155
55 110111 7 55 [Pad] {C135} 135 {C146} 146 {C156} 156
56 111000 8 56 [2 Shift A] {C136} 136 {C147} 147 {C157} 157
57 111001 9 57 [3 Shift A] {C137} 137 {C148} 148 {C158} 158
58 111010 : 58 [Pad] [Latch A] [Latch A] [Latch A]
59 111011 [Shift B] [Shift A] Space 32 Space 32 Space 32
60 111100 [Shift C] [Shift C] [Lock In C] [Shift C] [Shift C]
61 111101 [Shift D] [Shift D] [Shift D] [Lock In D] [Shift D]
62 111110 [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Lock In E]
63 111111 [Latch B] [Latch A] [Latch B] [Latch B] [Latch B]

- 252 -
c How to send control code data
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)

e How to send a Kanji code

Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used, however, it can be designated.
If it is designated, data following “NUL” code is not printed.

- 253 -
(13) CP code

[Transfer Code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

c How to send control code data

NUL (00H) → >@ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → >A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → >B (3EH, 42H)
to
GS (1DH) → >] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → >^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → >_ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to send a special code
> (3EH) → >0 (3EH, 30H)
e How to send a Kanji code
Shift JIS
JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)

- 254 -
13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA
: Field to be incremented/decremented
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)
: Field subject to printing numerals under bars.

Type of Bar Code: JAN8, EAN8

(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

7 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

- 255 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13, EAN13
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

12 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

- 256 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

- 257 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the bar code.
Data
6 digits

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D
Data

Other than 6 digits Not to be drawn

- 258 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

- 259 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

- 260 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

14 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

- 261 -
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

17 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

- 262 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Data

13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

- 263 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Data

16 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

- 264 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 2 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in

Data the bar code.

8 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

- 265 -
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 5 digits
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input Calculate and reflect modulus

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data 10 C/D in the bar code.

11 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

- 266 -
Type of Bar Code: MSI
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 15 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

16 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) IBM modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 15 digits To be checked IBM as modulus 10
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
16 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 14 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.

15 digits or more Not to be drawn

(4) IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 10.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

(5) IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 11.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 267 -
Type of Bar Code: Interleaved 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

(4) Auto affix of DBP modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a DBP modulus 10.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 268 -
Type of Bar Code: Industrial 2 of 5
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus check character check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as a modulus check character
(including C/D)
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus check character

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus check character.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 269 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Standard)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
124 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 43 check

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
124 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 122 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

123 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 270 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Drawing
Data
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

(2) Modulus 43 check

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
61 digits or more

(3) Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

Type of Bar Code: NW7

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix
No. of Input Digits

Input St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data
Max. 125 digits Start code Stop code

Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp
Data

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 271 -
Type of Bar Code: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)
(1) No affix
PSEUDO103 check
Auto affix of PSEUDO103
No. of Input Digits

Input
Min. 3 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data
Max. 125 digits
(including start
code) Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Data
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.
2 digits or less
Not to be drawn
126 digits or more

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

Type of Bar Code: Auto selection of CODE128

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Max. 60 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp
Data Stop code
Start code Selection code Affix
PSEUDO103
C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

- 272 -
Type of Bar Code: CODE93
(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 60 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 Sp
Drawing
Data Stop code
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.
Start code Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

Type of Bar Code: UCC/EAN128

(1) No affix
C/D check
Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits St FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 Sp

Drawing
Data
Start code Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.
Stop code
Other than 19 digits Not to be drawn

- 273 -
Type of Bar Code: POSTNET
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
Data

5 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
Drawing St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp Fr D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Fr

Drawing Start code Frame Frame
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Other than 5, 9, and
Not to be drawn
11 digits

Type of Bar Code: RM4SCC

(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input (St) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 (Sp)

Data
Start code Stop code
12 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit
13 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Bar Code: KIX CODE

(1) No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

19 digits or more Not to be drawn

- 274 -
Type of Bar Code: Customer bar code
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Data

20 digits
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D Sp
Drawing
Data Start code Dedicated check digit
Stop code
21 digits or more Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.

Type of Bar Code: Highest priority customer bar code

(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D Sp

Drawing Start code CC7

Data
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
20 digits or more Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.

- 275 -
14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE
Type of Bar Code Designation of Start/Stop Code Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Omit Full ASCII *12345ABC*
(No designation) 12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard **12345ABC*
CODE 39 Add start code Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC
Full ASCII *12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard ***12345ABC
Full ASCII */J/J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard **12345ABC**
Full ASCII */J12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard **12345*ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC**
Full ASCII 12345ABC/J*
Add stop code *12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC*
Full ASCII 12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC***
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC**
Full ASCII *12345/JABC/J*

- 276 -
Type of Bar Code Designation of Start/Stop Code Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC
Full ASCII 12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
CODE 39 Start/stop code Full ASCII *12345ABC*
not added 12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC
Full ASCII 12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*

Type of Bar Code Designation of Start/Stop Code Input Data Drawing Data
12345678 a12345678a
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Omit b12345678d b12345678d
(No designation) 12345a678 a12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c
12345678 a12345678
a12345678 aa12345678
12345678c a12345678c
Add start code b12345678d ab12345678d
12345a678 a12345a678
ab12345678 aab12345678
a12345678bc aa12345678bc
d12345b678c ad12345b678c
NW7 12345678 12345678a
a12345678 a12345678a
12345678c 12345678ca
b12345678d b12345678da
Add stop code 12345a678 12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678a
a12345678bc a12345678bca
d12345b678c d12345b678ca
12345678 12345678
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Start/stop code b12345678d b12345678d
not added 12345a678 12345a678
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c

- 277 -